Micro Motion 2700 Owner's Manual
Tangazo
Tangazo
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053, Rev AC
October 2022
Micro Motion
™
2700 Transmitters with
Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
Safety messages
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
Safety and approval information
This Micro Motion product complies with all applicable European directives when properly installed in accordance with the instructions in this manual. Refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for directives that apply to this product. The following are available: the EU Declaration of Conformity, with all applicable European directives, and the complete ATEX installation drawings and instructions. In addition, the IECEx installation instructions for installations outside of the European Union and the CSA installation instructions for installations in North America are available at Emerson.com
or through your local Micro Motion support center.
Information affixed to equipment that complies with the Pressure Equipment Directive, can be found at Emerson.com
. For hazardous installations in Europe, refer to standard EN 60079-14 if national standards do not apply.
Other information
Troubleshooting information can be found in the Configuration Manual . Product data sheets and manuals are available from the
Micro Motion website at Emerson.com
.
Return policy
Follow Micro Motion procedures when returning equipment. These procedures ensure legal compliance with government transportation agencies and help provide a safe working environment for Micro Motion employees. If you fail to follow Micro
Motion procedures, then Micro Motion will not accept your returned equipment.
Return procedures and forms are available on our web support site at Emerson.com
, or by calling the Micro Motion Customer
Service department.
2
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Contents
October 2022
Contents
Configuration and Use Manual 3
Contents
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application.........................131
11.3 Use Production Volume Reconciliation, Transient Mist Remediation, and Transient Bubble
4 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Contents
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual 5
Contents
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
6 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Before you begin
October 2022
1 Before you begin
1.1 About this manual
This manual helps you configure, commission, use, maintain, and troubleshoot Micro Motion 2700 transmitters with configurable inputs and outputs.
Important
This manual assumes that:
• The transmitter has been installed correctly and completely according to the instructions in the transmitter installation manual.
• Users understand basic transmitter and sensor installation, configuration, and maintenance concepts and procedures.
1.2 Hazard messages
This document uses the following criteria for hazard messages based on ANSI standards Z535.6-2011
(R2017).
DANGER
Serious injury or death will occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
WARNING
Serious injury or death could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
CAUTION
Minor or moderate injury will or could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
NOTICE
Data loss, property damage, hardware damage, or software damage can occur if a situation is not avoided.
There is no credible risk of physical injury.
Physical access
WARNING
Unauthorized personnel can potentially cause significant damage and/or misconfiguration of end users' equipment. Protect against all intentional or unintentional unauthorized use.
Physical security is an important part of any security program and fundamental to protecting your system.
Restrict physical access to protect users' assets. This is true for all systems used within the facility.
1.3 Transmitter model code
You can verify that this manual pertains to your transmitter by ensuring the model code on the transmitter tag matches the format.
Example:
Configuration and Use Manual 7
8
Before you begin
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
The transmitter has a model number of the following form: 2700(R/I/E/B/C/M/P/H)**(B/C)******
• Mounting options
R 4-wire remote-mount with aluminum housing
I Integral mount
E 4-wire remote mount transmitter with 9-wire remote enhanced core processor
B 4-wire remote mount transmitter with 9-wire remote core processor
C 9-wire remote-mount with integral core processor and aluminum housing
M 4-wire remote mount with stainless steel housing
P 9-wire remote mount transmitter with integral core processor and stainless steel housing
H 4-wire remote mount for connecting to CDM/FDM/FVM meters
• Output options board
B Configurable input/outputs option board, default configuration (two mA outputs, one frequency output)
C Configurable input/outputs option board, custom configuration
1.4 Communications tools and protocols
You can use several different communications tools and protocols to interface with the transmitter, use different tools in different locations, or use different tools for different tasks.
Tool
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Supported protocols
• HART ® /Bell 202
• Service port
HART/Bell 202
For information about how to use the communication tools, see the appendices in this manual.
Tip
You may be able to use other communications tools, such as AMS ™ Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or the
Smart Wireless THUM
Emerson.com
.
™ Adapter. Use of AMS or the Smart Wireless THUM Adapter is not discussed in this manual. For more information on the Smart Wireless THUM Adapter, refer to the documentation available at
Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Before you begin
October 2022
1.5 Related documentation
You can find all product documentation on the product documentation DVD shipped with the product or at
Emerson.com
.
See any of the following documents for more information:
• Micro Motion Series 1000 and Series 2000 Transmitters with MVD Technology Product Data Sheet
• Micro Motion 1700 and 2700 Installation Manual
• Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application Manual
• Micro Motion Fuel Consumption Application for Transmitters Installation and Operation Guide
• Micro Motion Multiphase Applications Supplement
• Modbus Interface Tool
• Sensor installation manual
Configuration and Use Manual 9
Before you begin
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
10 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Quick start
October 2022
2 Quick start
2.1 Power up the transmitter
The transmitter must be powered up for all configuration and commissioning tasks or for process measurement.
Procedure
1.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Ensure that all transmitter and sensor covers and seals are closed.
2. Turn on the electrical power at the power supply.
The transmitter will automatically perform diagnostic routines. The transmitter is self-switching and will automatically detect the supply voltage. When using DC power, a minimum of 1.5 amps of startup current is required. During this period, Alert 009 is active. The diagnostic routines should complete in approximately 30 seconds. The status LED will turn green and begin to flash when the startup diagnostics are complete. If the status LED exhibits different behavior, an alert is active.
Postrequisites
Although the sensor is ready to receive process fluid shortly after power-up, the electronics can take up to ten minutes to reach thermal equilibrium. Therefore, if this is the initial startup, or if power has been off long enough to allow components to reach ambient temperature, allow the electronics to warm up for approximately ten minutes before relying on process measurements. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or inaccuracy.
2.2 Check meter status
Check the meter for any error conditions that require user action or that affect measurement accuracy.
Procedure
1. Wait approximately 10 seconds for the power-up sequence to complete.
Immediately after power-up, the transmitter runs through diagnostic routines and checks for error conditions. During the power-up sequence, Alert A009 is active. This alert should clear automatically when the power-up sequence is complete.
2. Check the status LED on the transmitter.
Related information
View and acknowledge status alerts
Status alerts, causes, and recommendations
Configuration and Use Manual 11
Quick start
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
2.2.1 Transmitter status reported by LED
LED state
Solid green
Flashing green (if enabled)
Solid yellow
Flashing yellow (if enabled)
Solid red
Flashing red (if enabled)
Description
No alerts are active.
Unacknowledged corrected condition (no alert)
One or more low-severity alerts are active.
A low severity alarm can mean one or more process variables is at a set output level (i.e.
simulation or two phase timeout).
Calibration in progress, or Known Density
Verification in progress.
One or more low-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
One or more high-severity alerts are active.
One or more high-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
Recommendation
Continue with configuration or process measurement.
Continue with configuration or process measurement. Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
If Status LED Blinking is disabled, all LEDs will show a solid color rather than flashing.
2.3 Make a startup connection to the transmitter
For all configuration tools except the display, you must have an active connection to the transmitter to configure the transmitter.
Procedure
Identify the connection type to use, and follow the instructions for that connection type in the appropriate appendix.
Communications tool
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Connection type to use
Service port
HART
Instructions
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
12 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Quick start
October 2022
2.4 Verify mass flow measurement
Check to see that the mass flow rate reported by the transmitter is accurate. You can use any available method.
Procedure
• Read the value for Mass Flow Rate on the transmitter display.
Menu → Operations → Process Variable Values
• Connect to the transmitter with ProLink III and read the value for Mass Flow Rate in the Process Variables panel.
• Connect to the transmitter with a field communicator and read the value for Mass Flow Rate .
Online → Overview → Mass Flow Rate
Postrequisites
If the reported mass flow rate is not accurate:
• Check the characterization parameters.
• Review the troubleshooting suggestions for flow measurement issues.
For information about modifying these values, refer to Configure mass flow measurement
.
2.5 Verify the zero
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
The zero verification procedure analyzes the Live Zero value under conditions of zero flow, and compares it to the Zero Stability range for the sensor. If the average Live Zero value is within a reasonable range, the zero value stored in the transmitter is valid. Performing a field calibration will not improve measurement accuracy.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the meter unless one of the following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
• The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Procedure
1. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
2. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
3. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
4. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
Configuration and Use Manual 13
Quick start
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
5. From ProLink III, choose Device Tools → Calibration → Zero Verification and Calibration → Verify
Zero and wait until the procedure completes.
6. Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero or
Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the meter.
7. If the zero verification procedure fails: a) Confirm that the sensor is completely blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
b) Verify that the process fluid is not flashing or condensing, and that it does not contain particles that can settle out.
c) Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise if appropriate.
d) Repeat the zero verification procedure.
e) If it fails again, zero the meter.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Related information
2.5.1 Terminology used with zero verification and zero calibration
Term
Zero
Factory Zero
Field Zero
Prior Zero
Manual Zero
Live Zero
Zero Stability
Zero Calibration
Zero Time
Definition
In general, the offset required to synchronize the left pickoff and the right pickoff under conditions of zero flow. Unit = microseconds.
The zero value obtained at the factory, under laboratory conditions.
The zero value obtained by performing a zero calibration outside the factory.
The zero value stored in the transmitter at the time a field zero calibration is begun. May be the factory zero or a previous field zero.
The zero value stored in the transmitter, typically obtained from a zero calibration procedure. It may also be configured manually. Also called “mechanical zero” or “stored zero”.
The real-time bidirectional mass flow rate with no flow damping or mass flow cutoff applied. An adaptive damping value is applied only when the mass flow rate changes dramatically over a very short interval. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A laboratory-derived value used to calculate the expected accuracy for a sensor. Under laboratory conditions at zero flow, the average flow rate is expected to fall within the range defined by the Zero Stability value (0 ± Zero Stability). Each sensor size and model has a unique Zero Stability value.
The procedure used to determine the zero value.
The time period over which the Zero Calibration procedure is performed. Unit = seconds.
14 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Quick start
October 2022
Term
Field Verification Zero
Zero Verification
Definition
A 3-minute running average of the Live Zero value, calculated by the transmitter. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A procedure used to evaluate the stored zero and determine whether or not a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
Configuration and Use Manual 15
Quick start
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
16 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
October 2022
3 Introduction to configuration and commissioning
3.1 Configuration flowchart
Use the following flowchart as a general guide to the configuration and commissioning process.
Some options may not apply to your installation. Detailed information is provided in the remainder of this manual. If you are using the Weights & Measures application, additional configuration and setup are required.
Configure device options and preferences
Test and move to production
Configure process measurement
Configure mass flow measurement
Configure display parameters
Test or tune transmitter using sensor simulation
Configure volume flow meaurement
Configure fault handling parameters
Back up transmitter configuration
Liquid
Volume flow type
Gas
Define gas properties
Configure sensor parameters
Configure device parameters
Enable write-protection on transmitter configuration
Done
Configure flow direction
Configure density measurement
Configure temperature measurement
Configure petroleum measurement (API) application (if available)
Configure concentration measurement application
(if available)
Configure pressure compensation (optional)
Configure PVR, TMR,
TBR, or fuel consumption
(if available)
Integrate device with control system
Configure the channel(s)
Configure the mA output(s)
Configure the frequency output(s)
Configure the discrete output(s)
Configure the discrete input
Configure events
Configure digital communications
Configuration and Use Manual 17
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
3.2 Default values and ranges
3.3 Enable access to the off-line menu of the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Offline Variable Menu Features
By default, access to the off-line menu of the display is enabled. If it is disabled, you must enable it if you want to use the display to configure the transmitter.
Restriction
You cannot use the display to enable access to the off-line menu. You must make a connection from another tool.
3.4 Disable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
Display
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT → CONFG → LOCK
Device Tools → Configuration → Write-Protection
If the transmitter is write-protected, the configuration is locked and you must unlock it before you can change any configuration parameters. By default, the transmitter is not write-protected.
Tip
Write-protecting the transmitter prevents accidental changes to configuration. It does not prevent normal operational use. You can always disable write-protection, perform any required configuration changes, then re-enable write-protection.
3.5 Restore the factory configuration
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Restore Factory Configuration
Service Tools → Maintenance → Reset/Restore → Restore Factory Configuration
Restoring the factory configuration returns the transmitter to the same configuration it had when it left the factory. This may be useful if you experience problems during configuration.
Important
You cannot restore factory configurations with a 700 core.
Tip
Restoring the factory configuration is not a common action. You may want to contact customer support to see if there is a preferred method to resolve any issues.
18 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
4 Configure process measurement
4.1 Configure mass flow measurement
The mass flow measurement parameters control how mass flow is measured and reported.
4.1.1 Configure Mass Flow Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → UNITS → MASS
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Mass Flow Unit
Mass Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the mass flow rate. The unit used for mass total and mass inventory is derived from this unit.
You can configure the mA and Frequency Outputs independently. For example, you can configure the mA
Output for mass flow and the Frequency Output for liquid volume or gas standard volume. If the same process variable is assigned to both the mA and Frequency Outputs, then any selected measurement unit,
(mass, volume or gas standard volume), is automatically applied to both outputs.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
The default setting for Mass Flow Measurement Unit is g/sec (grams per second).
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Mass Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Mass Flow Measurement Unit , plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Grams per second
Grams per minute
Grams per hour
Kilograms per second
Kilograms per minute
Kilograms per hour
Kilograms per day
Metric tons per minute
Metric tons per hour
Display
G/S
G/MIN
G/H
KG/S
KG/MIN
KG/H
KG/D
T/MIN
T/H
ProLink III
Label g/sec g/min g/hr kg/sec kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr
Field Communicator g/s g/min g/h kg/s kg/min kg/h kg/d
MetTon/min
MetTon/h
Configuration and Use Manual 19
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Unit description
Metric tons per day
Pounds per second
Pounds per minute
Display
T/D
LB/S
LB/MIN
Pounds per hour
Pounds per day
LB/H
LB/D
Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute ST/MIN
Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour ST/H
Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
Special unit
ST/D
LT/H
LT/D
SPECL
ProLink III
Label mTon/day lbs/sec lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day special
Field Communicator
MetTon/d lb/s lb/min lb/h lb/d
STon/min
STon/h
STon/d
LTon/h
LTon/d
Spcl
Define a special measurement unit for mass flow
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Special Units
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Special Units → Mass Special Units
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1. Specify Base Mass Unit .
Base Mass Unit is the existing mass unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Mass Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
The original mass flow rate value is divided by this value.
4. Enter Mass Flow Conversion Factor .
5. Set Mass Flow Label to the name you want to use for the mass flow unit.
20 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
6. Set Mass Total Label to the name you want to use for the mass total and mass inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for mass flow
You want to measure mass flow in ounces per second (oz/sec).
1. Set Base Mass Unit to Pounds (lb).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor : a. 1 lb/sec = 16 oz/sec b.
Mass Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 16 = 0.0625
4. Set Mass Flow Conversion Factor to 0.0625
.
5. Set Mass Flow Label to oz/sec .
6. Set Mass Total Label to oz .
4.1.2 Configure Flow Damping
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Flow Damping
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable. At the end of the interval, the internal value will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Flow Damping to the value you want to use.
The default value is 0.8 seconds. The range depends on the core processor type and the setting of Update
Rate , as shown in the following table.
Update Rate setting
Normal
Special
Damping range
0 to 51.2 seconds
0 to 40.96 seconds
The value you enter is automatically rounded off to the nearest valid value. For example, if the damping is currently set to 0.8 seconds, any value entered up to 1.2 seconds will be rounded down to 0.8 seconds, and any value entered from 1.21 to 1.59 seconds will be rounded up to 1.6 seconds.
Update Rate setting
Normal
Special
Valid damping values
0.0, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8, 25.6, 51.2
0.0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, 0.32, 0.64, 1.28, 2.56, 5.12, 10.24,
20.48, 40.96
Configuration and Use Manual 21
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Effect of flow damping on volume measurement
Flow damping affects volume measurement for liquid volume data. Flow damping also affects volume measurement for gas standard volume data. The transmitter calculates volume data from the damped mass flow data.
Interaction between Flow Damping and mA Output Damping
In some circumstances, both Flow Damping and mA Output Damping are applied to the reported mass flow value.
Flow Damping controls the rate of change in flow process variables. mA Output Damping controls the rate of change reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, and both
Flow Damping and mA Output Damping are set to non-zero values, flow damping is applied first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation.
4.1.3 Configure Mass Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Mass Flow Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest mass flow rate that will be reported as measured. All mass flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Mass Flow Cutoff is 0.0 g/sec or a sensor-specific value set at the factory. The recommended value is 0.5% of the nominal flow rate of the attached sensor. See the sensor specifications. Do not leave Mass Flow Cutoff at 0.0 g/sec.
Effect of Mass Flow Cutoff on volume measurement
Mass Flow Cutoff does not affect volume measurement. Volume data is calculated from the actual mass data rather than the reported value.
Volume flow has a separate Volume Flow Cutoff that is not affected by the Mass Flow Cutoff value.
Interaction between Mass Flow Cutoff and mA Output Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff defines the lowest mass flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output
Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, the mass flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Mass Flow Cutoff affects all reported values and values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on mass flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only mass flow values reported through mA Output.
22 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff : 10 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff : 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, mass flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff : 15 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff : 10 g/sec
Result:
• If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
4.2 Configure volume flow measurement for liquid applications
The volume flow measurement parameters control how liquid volume flow is measured and reported.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or the other.
Note
If you need to switch from gas standard volume to liquid volume, polling for base density will automatically be disabled.
4.2.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for liquid applications
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → GSV → Volume Flow Type → Liquid
Configuration and Use Manual 23
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with some applications. Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid if you are using any of the following applications:
• Petroleum measurement
• Concentration measurement
• Fuel consumption
• Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR)
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
4.2.2 Configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → UNITS → VOL
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Volume Flow Unit
Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measurement that will be displayed for the volume flow rate. The unit used for the volume total and volume inventory is based on this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit , be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
To read US gallons, select that unit from this menu. G/MIN stands for grams per minute (USGPM), not gallons per minute. The default setting for Volume Flow Measurement Unit is l/sec (liters per second).
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Volume Flow Measurement Unit , plus one user-defined measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Cubic feet per second
Cubic feet per minute
Cubic feet per hour
Display
CUFT/S
CUF/MN
CUFT/H
ProLink III
Label ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr
Field Communicator
Cuft/s
Cuft/min
Cuft/h
24 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Unit description
Cubic feet per day
Cubic meters per second
Cubic meters per minute
Cubic meters per hour
Cubic meters per day
U.S. gallons per second
U.S. gallons per minute
U.S. gallons per hour
U.S. gallons per day
Million U.S. gallons per day
Liters per second
Liters per minute
Liters per hour
Million liters per day
Imperial gallons per second
Imperial gallons per minute
Imperial gallons per hour
Imperial gallons per day
Barrels per second
Barrels per minute
Barrels per day
Beer barrels per second
Beer barrels per minute
Beer barrels per day
Special unit
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
L/S
L/MIN
L/H
MILL/D
UKGPS
UKGPM
UKGPH
UKGPD
Display
CUFT/D
M3/S
M3/MIN
M3/H
M3/D
USGPS
USGPM
USGPH
USGPD
MILG/D
BBL/S
BBL/MN
BBL/H
BBL/D
BBBL/S
BBBL/MN
BBBL/H
BBBL/D
SPECL
Define a special measurement unit for volume flow
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Special Units
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Special Units → Volume Special Units
Imp gal/sec
Imp gal/min
Imp gal/hr
Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr barrels/day
Beer barrels/sec
Beer barrels/min
Beer barrels/hr
Beer barrels/day special
ProLink III
Label ft3/day m3/sec m3/min m3/hr m3/day
US gal/sec
US gal/min
US gal/hr
US gal/day mil US gal/day l/sec l/min l/hr mil l/day bbl/s bbl/min bbl/h bbl/d bbbl/s bbbl/min bbbl/h bbbl/d
Spcl
Field Communicator
Cuft/d
Cum/s
Cum/min
Cum/h
Cum/d gal/s gal/min gal/h gal/d
MMgal/d
L/s
L/min
L/h
ML/d
Impgal/s
Impgal/min
Impgal/h
Impgal/d
Configuration and Use Manual 25
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1. Specify Base Volume Unit .
Base Volume Unit is the existing volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter Volume Flow Conversion Factor .
The original volume flow rate value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the volume flow unit.
6. Set Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the volume total and volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Defining a special measurement unit for volume flow
You want to measure volume flow in pints per second (pints/sec).
1. Set Base Volume Unit to Gallons (gal).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3. Calculate the conversion factor: a. 1 gal/sec = 8 pints/sec b.
Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 8 = 0.1250
4. Set Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.1250
.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to pints/sec .
6. Set Volume Total Label to pints .
4.2.3 Configure Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Volume Flow Cutoff
26 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest volume flow rate that will be reported as measured. All volume flow rates below this cutoff are reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Volume Flow Cutoff is 0.0 l/sec (liters per second). The lower limit is 0. Leaving the volume flow cutoff at 0 is not recommended.
Interaction between Volume Flow Cutoff and mAO Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest liquid volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mAO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process
Variable is set to Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the volume flow values reported via the outputs and the volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on the volume flow).
mAO Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff lower than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff : 10 l/sec
• Volume Flow Cutoff : 15 l/sec
Result: If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec, volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff higher than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff : 15 l/sec
• Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 l/sec
Result:
• If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec but not below 10 l/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the volume flow rate drops below 10 l/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Configuration and Use Manual 27
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
4.3 Configure GSV flow measurement
The gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement parameters control how volume flow is measured and reported in a gas application.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or the other.
4.3.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for gas applications
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → GSV → Volume Flow Type → Standard Gas Volume
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement is used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with some applications. Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid if you are using any of the following applications:
• Petroleum measurement
• Concentration measurement
• Fuel consumption
• Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR)
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Gas Standard Volume.
4.3.2 Configure Standard Density of Gas
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → GSV → Gas Ref Density
The Standard Density of Gas value is the gas density at standard reference conditions. Use it to convert the measured mass flow data to volume flow at reference conditions.
Prerequisites
Ensure that Density Measurement Unit is set to the measurement unit you want to use for Standard Density of Gas .
Procedure
From the Source field, choose the method to supply gas base density data and perform the required setup.
28 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Option
Fixed Value or Digital
Communications
Poll for external value
Option
Poll as Primary
Poll as Secondary
Description
A host writes gas base density data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Continue to Configure fixed value or digital communications
.
The meter polls an external HART density.
® device for gas base density data in order to then compute gas standard volume from the mass flow and gas base
Continue to Poll for external value .
Configure fixed value or digital communications
Prerequisites
Configure Standard Density of Gas
Procedure
1. Set Standard Density of Gas to the standard reference density of the gas you are measuring.
Note
ProLink III provides a guided method that you can use to calculate your gas base density, if you do not know it.
2. Continue to
Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit .
Poll for external value
Prerequisites
Configure Standard Density of Gas
Procedure
1. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
2. Set Polling Control n as one of the following options:
The n is the value you selected in the Polling Slot field.
If there is another master, and if that master is primary, then set this field to secondary. If the other master is secondary, then set this field to primary.
Description
No other HART ® masters will be on the network.
Other HART ® masters will be on the network.
3. Set External Device Tag n to the HART tag of the device being polled.
The n is the value you selected in the Polling Slot field.
• The device being polled (slave) cannot have special units set for density. Otherwise, the master will reject the base density and report the following alarm:
A115: No External Input or Polled Data Alert
Configuration and Use Manual 29
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• On the slave side, setup the HART Primary Variable for Base Density. The master will reject anything other than Base Density for the HART Primary Variable and trigger an A115 alarm.
• The density units on the transmitter and the polled device can be different as long as they can be classified as density units; for example, kg/m into compatible specified units.
3 and g/cm 3 . The transmitter converts the polled units
For wiring and setup instructions for a polled device, refer to the Micro Motion Gas Density Meters (GDM)
Installation Manual or the Micro Motion Specific Gravity Meters (SGM) Installation Manual .
4. Continue to
Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit .
4.3.3 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → UNITS → GSV
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → GSV → GSV Flow Unit
Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be displayed for the gas standard volume flow. The measurement unit used for the gas volume total and the gas volume inventory is derived from this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit , be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to Gas Standard
Volume.
For polling, the first transmitter (master) requests density from a second transmitter (slave) via HART ® communications. Special units for GSV are allowed on the master side, but the device being polled (slave) cannot have special units set for density, otherwise the master will reject the base density and report an A115:
No External Input or Polled Data Alert.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit to the unit you want to use.
The default setting for Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit is SCFM (Standard Cubic Feet per Minute).
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit , plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Normal cubic meters per second
Normal cubic meters per minute
Normal cubic meters per hour
Display
NM3/S
NM3/MN
NM3/H
ProLink III
Label
Nm3/sec
Nm3/sec
Nm3/hr
Field Communicator
Nm3/sec
Nm3/min
Nm3/hr
30 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Unit description
Normal cubic meters per day
Normal liters per second
Normal liters per minute
Normal liters per hour
Normal liters per day
Standard cubic feet per second
Standard cubic feet per minute
Standard cubic feet per hour
Standard cubic feet per day
Standard cubic meters per second
Standard cubic meters per minute
Standard cubic meters per hour
Standard cubic meters per day
Standard liters per second
Standard liters per minute
Standard liters per hour
Standard liters per day
Special measurement unit
SM3/MN
SM3/H
SM3/D
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
SPECL
Display
NM3/D
NLPS
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
SM3/S
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Sm3/day
SLPS
ProLink III
Label
Nm3/day
NLPS
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD special
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
Special
Field Communicator
Nm3/day
NLPS
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Define a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Special Units
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Special Units → Special GSV Units
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1. Specify Base Gas Standard Volume Unit .
Base Gas Standard Volume Unit is the existing gas standard volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit .
Configuration and Use Manual 31
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a) x base units = y special units b) Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter the Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor .
The original gas standard volume flow value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume flow unit.
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume total and gas standard volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
You want to measure gas standard volume flow in thousands of standard cubic feet per minute.
1. Set Base Gas Standard Volume Unit to SCF.
2. Set Base Time Unit to minutes (min).
3. Calculate the conversion factor: a. 1 thousands of standard cubic feet per minute = 1000 cubic feet per minute b.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 1000 = 0.001 standard
4. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.001
.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to MSCFM .
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to MSCF .
4.3.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → GSV → GSV Cutoff
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest gas standard volume flow rate that will reported as measured. All gas standard volume flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff is 0.0. The lower limit is 0.0. There is no upper limit.
The recommended value is 0.5% of the nominal flow rate of the attached sensor. See the sensor specifications.
32 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Interaction between Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff and mA Output
Cutoff
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest Gas Standard Volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output.
If mA Output Process Variable is set to Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the gas standard volume flow values reported through outputs and the gas standard volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (for example, events defined on gas standard volume flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 10 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 15 SLPM
Result: If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM, the volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 15 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 SLPM
Result:
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM but not below 10 SLPM:
— The primary mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 10 SLPM, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
4.4 Configure Flow Direction
Display
ProLink III
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Configuration and Use Manual 33
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Field Communicator Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow → Flow Direction
Flow Direction controls how forward flow and reverse flow affect flow measurement and reporting.
Flow Direction is defined with respect to the flow arrow on the sensor:
• Forward flow (positive flow) moves in the direction of the flow arrow on the sensor.
• Reverse flow (negative flow) moves in the direction opposite to the flow arrow on the sensor.
Tip
Micro Motion sensors are bidirectional. Measurement accuracy is not affected by actual flow direction or the setting of the Flow Direction parameter.
Procedure
Set Flow Direction to the value you want to use.
The default setting is Forward.
4.4.1 Options for Flow Direction
ProLink III
Forward
Flow Direction setting
Field Communicator
Forward
Reverse
Absolute Value
Bidirectional
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Reverse
Absolute Value
Bi directional
Negate/Forward Only
Negate/Bi-directional
Relationship to Flow Direction arrow on sensor
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the same direction as the majority of flow.
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the opposite direction from the majority of flow.
Flow Direction arrow is not relevant.
Appropriate when both forward and reverse flow are expected, and forward flow will dominate, but the amount of reverse flow will be significant.
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the opposite direction from the majority of flow.
Appropriate when both forward and reverse flow are expected, and reverse flow will dominate, but the amount of forward flow will be significant.
Effect of Flow Direction on mA Outputs
Flow Direction affects how the transmitter reports flow values via the mA Outputs. The mA Outputs are affected by Flow Direction only if mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable.
Flow Direction and mA Outputs
The effect of Flow Direction on the mA Outputs depends on Lower Range Value configured for the mA
Output:
• If Lower Range Value is set to 0, see
• If Lower Range Value
is set to a negative value, see Figure 4-2
.
34 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Figure 4-1: Effect of Flow Direction on the mA Output: Lower Range Value = 0
Flow Direction = Forward
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
Flow Direction = Reverse, Negate Forward
20
Flow Direction = Absolute Value, Bidirectional,
Negate Bidirectional
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
• Lower Range Value = 0
• Upper Range Value = x
Figure 4-2: Effect of Flow Direction on the mA Output: Lower Range Value < 0
Flow Direction = Forward
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
Flow Direction = Reverse, Negate Forward
20
Flow Direction = Absolute Value, Bidirectional,
Negate Bidirectional
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
• Lower Range Value = − x
• Upper Range Value = x
Flow Direction = Forward and Lower Range Value = 0
Configuration:
• Flow Direction = Forward
• Lower Range Value = 0 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = 100 g/sec
Configuration and Use Manual 35
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Result:
• Under conditions of zero flow, the mA Output is 4 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, up to a flow rate of 100 g/sec, the mA Output varies between 4 mA and
20 mA in proportion to the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA Output will be proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
Flow Direction = Forward and Lower Range Value < 0
Configuration:
• Flow Direction = Forward
• Lower Range Value = − 100 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = +100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of zero flow, the mA Output is 12 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, the mA Output varies between
12 mA and 20 mA in proportion to (the absolute value of) the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if (the absolute value of) the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA Output is proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and − 100 g/sec, the mA Output varies between
4 mA and 12 mA in inverse proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA
Output is inversely proportional to the flow rate down to 3.8 mA, and will be level at 3.8 mA at higher absolute values.
Flow Direction = Reverse
Configuration:
• Flow Direction = Reverse
• Lower Range Value = 0 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = 100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of zero flow, the mA Output is 4 mA.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, the mA Output level varies between 4 mA and 20 mA in proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA
Output will be proportional to the absolute value of the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at
20.5 mA at higher absolute values.
36 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Effect of flow direction on Frequency Outputs
Flow direction affects how the transmitter reports flow values via the Frequency Outputs. The Frequency
Outputs are affected by flow direction only if Frequency Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable.
Table 4-1: Effect of the flow direction parameter and actual flow direction on Frequency Outputs
Flow Direction setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
Hz > 0
0 Hz
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
0 Hz
Hz > 0
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
0 Hz
0 Hz
Reverse
0 Hz
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Effect of flow direction on Discrete Outputs
The flow direction parameter affects the Discrete Output behavior only if Discrete Output Source is set to
Flow Direction.
Table 4-2: Effect of the flow direction parameter and actual flow direction on Discrete Outputs
Flow Direction setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
OFF
OFF
Reverse
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Effect of flow direction on digital communications
Flow direction affects how flow values are reported via digital communications. The following table describes the effect of the flow direction parameter and actual flow direction on flow values reported via digital communications.
Table 4-3: Effect of the flow direction on flow values
Flow Direction setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Forward
Positive
Positive
Positive
0
0
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
0
Reverse
Negative
Negative
Negative
Configuration and Use Manual 37
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 4-3: Effect of the flow direction on flow values (continued)
Flow Direction setting
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
Negative
Negative
0
0
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
0
Reverse
Positive
Positive
(1) Refer to the digital communications status bits for an indication of whether flow is positive or negative.
Effect of flow direction on flow totals
Flow direction affects how flow totals and inventories are calculated.
Flow Direction setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
Totals increase
Totals do not change
Totals increase
Totals increase
Totals do not change
Totals decrease
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Totals do not change
Reverse
Totals do not change
Totals increase
Totals decrease
Totals increase
Totals increase
Totals increase
4.5 Configure density measurement
The density measurement parameters control how density is measured and reported.
4.5.1 Configure Density Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → UNITS → DENS
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Density Unit
Density Measurement Unit controls the measurement units that will be used in density calculations and reporting.
Procedure
Set Density Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
The default setting for Density Measurement Unit is g/cm3 (grams per cubic centimeter).
38 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Options for Density Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Density Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels.
ProLink III
SGU g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l kg/m3 lbs/Usgal lbs/ft3 lbs/in3 degAPI sT/yd3
Label
Unit description
Grams per cubic centimeter
Grams per liter
Grams per milliliter
Kilograms per liter
Kilograms per cubic meter
Pounds per U.S. gallon
Pounds per cubic foot
Pounds per cubic inch
Degrees API
Short ton per cubic yard
Display
SGU
G/CM3
G/L
G/mL
KG/L
KG/M3
LB/GAL
LB/CUF
LB/CUI
D API
ST/CUY
(1) Non-standard calculation. This value represents line density divided by the density of water at 60 °F.
Field Communicator
SGU g/Cucm g/L g/mL kg/L kg/Cum lb/gal lb/Cuft lb/CuIn degAPI
STon/Cuyd
4.5.2 Configure two-phase flow parameters
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
• Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Slug Low Limit
• Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Slug High Limit
• Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Slug Duration
The two-phase flow parameters control how the transmitter detects and reports two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process).
Note
Two-phase flow is also referred to as slug flow .
Procedure
1. Set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to the lowest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values below this will cause the transmitter to post Alert A105 (Two-Phase Flow).
Tip
Gas entrainment can cause your process density to drop temporarily. To reduce the occurrence of twophase flow alerts that are not significant to your process, set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit slightly below your expected lowest process density.
Configuration and Use Manual 39
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
You must enter Two-Phase Flow Low Limit in g/cm ³ , even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
The default value for Two-Phase Flow Low Limit is 0.0 g/cm ³ . The range is 0.0 to 10.0 g/cm ³ .
2. Set Two-Phase Flow High Limit to the highest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Micro Motion recommends leaving Two-Phase Flow High Limit at the default value.
Values above this will cause the transmitter to post Alert A105 (Two-Phase Flow).
You must enter Two-Phase Flow High Limit in g/cm ³ , even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
The default value for Two-Phase Flow High Limit is 5.0 g/cm ³ . The range is 0.0 to 10.0 g/cm ³ .
3. Set Two-Phase Flow Timeout to the number of seconds that the transmitter will wait for a two-phase flow condition to clear before posting the alert.
The default value for Two-Phase Flow Timeout is 0.0 seconds, meaning that the alert will be posted immediately. The range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds.
The Two-Phase Flow alert is set immediately. The flow rate will hold the last measured value for the
Timeout time. Then the flow rate will report zero flow. If the density goes back in range, the error clears immediately.
Detecting and reporting two-phase flow
Two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process) can cause a variety of process control issues.
By configuring the two-phase flow parameters appropriately for your application, you can detect process conditions that require correction.
Micro Motion recommends leaving Two-Phase Flow High Limit at the default value.
A two-phase flow condition occurs whenever the measured density goes below Two-Phase Flow Low Limit or above Two-Phase Flow High Limit . If this occurs:
• A two-phase flow alert is posted to the active alert log.
• All outputs that are configured to represent flow rate hold their last pre-alert value for the number of seconds configured in Two-Phase Flow Timeout .
If the two-phase flow condition clears before Two-Phase Flow Timeout expires:
• Outputs that represent flow rate revert to reporting actual flow.
• The two-phase flow alert is deactivated, but remains in the active alert log until it is acknowledged.
If the two-phase flow condition does not clear before Two-Phase Flow Timeout expires, the outputs that represent flow rate report a flow rate of 0.
If Two-Phase Flow Timeout is set to 0.0 seconds, the outputs that represent flow rate will report a flow rate of
0 as soon as two-phase flow is detected.
4.5.3 Configure Density Damping
Display Not available
40 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Density Damping
Density Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the line density value.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable. At the end of the interval, the internal value will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Tip
Density damping affects all process variables that are calculated from line density.
Procedure
Set Density Damping to the value you want to use.
The default value is 1.6 seconds. For most applications, the default density damping setting is sufficient. The range depends on the core processor type and the setting of Update Rate , as shown in the following table:
Update Rate setting
Normal
Special
Damping range
0 to 51.2 seconds
0 to 40.96 seconds
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
The value you enter is automatically rounded off to the nearest valid value. The valid values for Density
Damping depend on the setting of Update Rate .
Update Rate setting
Normal
Special
Valid damping values
0.0, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2, 6.4, 12.8, 25.6, 51.2
0.0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, 0.32, 0.64, 1.28, 2.56, 5.12, 10.24,
20.48, 40.96
Configuration and Use Manual 41
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Effect of Density Damping on volume measurement
Density Damping affects liquid volume measurement. Liquid volume values are calculated from the damped density value rather than the measured density value. Density Damping does not affect gas standard volume measurement.
Interaction between Density Damping and Added Damping
When the mA Output is configured to report density, both Density Damping and Added Damping are applied to the reported density value.
Density Damping controls the rate of change in the value of the process variable in transmitter memory.
Added Damping controls the rate of change reported via the mA Output.
If mA Output Process Variable is set to Density, and both Density Damping and Added Damping are set to non-zero values, density damping is applied first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation. This value is reported over the mA Output.
4.5.4 Configure Density Cutoff
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density → Density Cutoff
Density Cutoff specifies the lowest density value that will be reported as measured. All density values below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Density Cutoff to the value you want to use.
For most applications, the default setting (0.2 g/cm ³ ) is sufficient. The range is 0.0 g/cm ³ to 0.5 g/cm ³ .
Effect of Density Cutoff on volume measurement
Density Cutoff affects liquid volume measurement. If the density value goes below Density Cutoff , the volume flow rate is reported as 0. Density Cutoff does not affect gas standard volume measurement. Gas standard volume values are always calculated from the value configured for Standard Gas Density or polled value if configured for polled base density.
4.6 Configure temperature measurement
The temperature measurement parameters control how temperature data from the sensor is reported.
4.6.1 Configure Temperature Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → UNITS → TEMP
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Temperature → Temperature Unit
42 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Temperature Measurement Unit specifies the unit that will be used for temperature measurement.
Procedure
Set Temperature Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
The default setting is Degrees Celsius.
Options for Temperature Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of units for Temperature Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
Degrees Rankine
Kelvin
°R
°K
Display
°C
°F
°R
°K
°C
°F
ProLink III
Label
Field Communicator degC degF degR
Kelvin
4.6.2 Configure Temperature Damping
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Temperature
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Temperature → Temp Damping
Temperature Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the line temperature value, when the on-board temperature data is used (RTD).
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable. At the end of the interval, the internal value will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Tip
Temperature Damping affects all process variables, compensations, and corrections that use temperature data from the sensor.
Procedure
Enter the value you want to use for Temperature Damping .
The default value is 4.8 seconds. For most applications, the default temperature damping setting is sufficient.
The range is 0.0 to 38.4 seconds.
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
Configuration and Use Manual 43
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
The value you enter is automatically rounded off to the nearest valid value. Valid values for Temperature
Damping are 0, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, and 38.4.
4.6.3 Effect of Temperature Damping on process measurement
Temperature Damping affects all processes and algorithms that use temperature data from the internal sensor RTD.
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the effect of temperature on the sensor tubes.
Petroleum measurement
Temperature Damping affects petroleum measurement process variables only if the transmitter is configured to use temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for petroleum measurement, Temperature Damping does not affect petroleum measurement process variables.
Concentration measurement
Temperature Damping affects concentration measurement process variables only if the transmitter is configured to use temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for concentration measurement, Temperature Damping does not affect concentration measurement process variables.
4.7 Configure the petroleum measurement application
The petroleum measurement application corrects line density to reference temperature according to
American Petroleum Institute (API) standards. The resulting process variable is referred density .
Restriction
The petroleum measurement application is not compatible with the following applications:
• Gas standard volume measurement (GSV)
• Concentration measurement
• Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR)
• Transient Mist Remediation (TMR)
• Fuel consumption
4.7.1 Configure petroleum measurement using ProLink III
The petroleum measurement parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
44 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
You must know the reference temperature that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Petroleum Measurement .
2. Specify the API table to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations.
a) Set Process Fluid to the API table group that your process fluid belongs to.
API table group
A tables
B tables
C tables
D tables
Process fluids
Generalized crude and JP4
Generalized products: Gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils, fuel oils, diesel, gas oil
Liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient
(TEC). You will be required to enter the TEC for your process fluid.
Lubricating oils b) Set Referred Density Measurement Unit to the measurement units that you want to use for referred density.
c) Click Apply .
These parameters uniquely identify the API table to be used to calculate referred density. The selected
API table is displayed, and the meter automatically changes the density unit, temperature unit, pressure unit, and reference pressure to match the API table.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTL).
Restriction
Not all combinations are supported by the petroleum measurement application. See the list of API tables in this manual.
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
5. Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in referred density calculations. If you choose Other, select the temperature measurement unit and enter the reference temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual 45
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
4.7.2 Set up temperature data for petroleum measurement using
ProLink III
The petroleum measurement application uses temperature data in its calculations. You must decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Tip
Fixed values for temperature are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature value may produce inaccurate process data.
Prerequisites
If you plan to poll an external device, the primary mA Output (Channel A) must be wired to support HART communications.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Petroleum Measurement .
2. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Internal RTD temperature data
Description
Temperature data from the onboard temperature sensor
(RTD) is used.
Setup a. Set Line Temperature Source b. Click Apply .
to Internal RTD.
Polling The meter polls an external device for temperature data.
This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Poll as Primary
Description
No other HART masters will be on the network. The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature device.
e. Click Apply .
46 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Option
Digital communications
Description
A host writes temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals. This data will be available in addition to the internal RTD temperature data.
Setup a. Set Line Temperature Source
Communications.
b. Click Apply .
to Fixed Value or Digital c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the meter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs group on the ProLink III main window.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
• For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART tag of the external device.
• For digital communications:
— Verify that the host has access to the required data.
— Verify that the host is writing to the correct register in memory, using the correct data type.
4.7.3 Configure petroleum measurement using the Field
Communicator
Procedure
1. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Set Up Petroleum .
2. Specify the API table to use.
a) Open the Petroleum Measurement Source menu and select the API table number.
Depending on your choice, you may be prompted to enter a reference temperature or a thermal expansion coefficient.
b) Enter the API table letter.
These two parameters uniquely specify the API table.
3. Determine how the transmitter will obtain temperature data for the petroleum measurement calculations, and perform the required setup.
Option
Temperature data from the sensor
Setup a. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements →
External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature .
Configuration and Use Manual 47
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option
A user-configured static temperature value
Setup b. Set External Temperature to Disabled.
a. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements →
External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature .
b. Set External Temperature to Enabled.
c. Set Correction Temperature to the value to be used.
Polling for temperature a. Ensure that the primary mA output has been wired to support HART polling.
b. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements →
External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature .
c. Set External Temperature to Enabled.
d. Choose External Polling .
e. Set Poll Control to Poll As Primary or Poll as Secondary.
f. Determine whether you will use Polling Slot 1 or Polling Slot 2.
g. For the chosen slot, set Ext Dev Tag to the HART tag of the external temperature device.
h. For the chosen slot, set Polled Variable to Temperature.
Tip
• Poll as Primary: No other HART masters will be on the network.
• Poll as Secondary: Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field
Communicator is not a HART master.
A value written by digital communications a. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements →
External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature .
b. Set External Temperature to Enabled.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is implemented and the transmitter is secured, digital communications cannot be used to write temperature or pressure data to the transmitter.
48 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
4.7.4 API tables supported by the petroleum measurement application
The API tables listed here are supported by the petroleum measurement application.
Table name
5A
5B
5D
6C
23A
23B
23D
24C
53A
53B
53D
54C
Process fluid
Generalized crude and
JP4
Generalized products
Lubricating oils
Liquids with a constant density base or known thermal expansion coefficient
Generalized crude and
JP4
Generalized products
Lubricating oils
Liquids with a constant density base or known thermal expansion coefficient
Generalized crude and
JP4
Generalized products
Lubricating oils
CTL source data
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
User-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient) and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
User-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient) and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Observed density and observed temperature
Reference temperature Density unit
60 °F (configurable) Degrees API
Range: 0 to 100
60 °F (configurable) Degrees API
Range: 0 to 85
60 °F (configurable)
60 °F (configurable)
Degrees API
Range: − 10 to +45
Degrees API
60 °F (configurable)
60 °F (configurable)
60 °F (configurable)
60 °F (configurable)
15 °C (configurable)
15 °C (configurable)
15 °C (configurable)
15 °C (configurable)
Relative density
Range: 0.6110 to 1.0760
Relative density
Range: 0.6535 to 1.0760
Relative density
Range: 0.8520 to 1.1640
Relative density
Base density
Range: 610 to
1075 kg/m 3
Base density
Range: 653 to
1075 kg/m 3
Base density
Range: 825 to
1164 kg/m 3
Base density in kg/m 3 Liquids with a constant density base or known thermal expansion coefficient
User-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient) and observed temperature
Configuration and Use Manual 49
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Restriction
These tables are not appropriate for the following process fluids: propane and propane mixes, butane and butane mixes, butadiene and butadiene mixes, isopentane, LNG, LPG, NGL, ethylene, propylene, cyclohexane, aeromatics, asphalts, and road tars.
4.8 Set up concentration measurement
This section guides you through loading and setting up a concentration matrix used for measurement. It does not cover building a concentration matrix.
The concentration measurement application calculates concentration data from process temperature and density. Micro Motion provides a set of concentration matrices that provide the reference data for several standard industry applications and process fluids. If desired, you can build a custom matrix for your process fluid, or purchase a custom matrix from Micro Motion.
Note
Concentration matrices can be made available on your transmitter either by loading an existing matrix from a file or by building a new matrix. Up to 6 matrices can be available on your transmitter, but only 1 can be used for measurement at any given time. For detailed information on building a matrix, see the Micro Motion
Enhanced Density Application Manual .
Prerequisites
Before you can configure concentration measurement:
• The concentration measurement application must be purchased on your transmitter.
• The concentration matrix you want to use must be available on your transmitter, or it must be available as a file on your computer.
• You must know the derived variable that your matrix is designed for.
• You must know the density unit used by your matrix.
• You must know the temperature unit used by your matrix.
• The concentration measurement application must be unlocked.
4.8.1 Configure concentration measurement using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density and set Density Unit to the density unit used by your matrix.
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature and set
Temperature Unit to the temperature unit used by your matrix.
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement .
4. Set Derived Variable to the derived variable that your matrix is designed for, and click Apply .
Important
• All concentration matrices on your transmitter must use the same derived variable. If you are using one of the standard matrices from Micro Motion, set Derived Variable to Mass Concentration
(Density). If you are using a custom matrix, see the reference information for your matrix.
50 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
• If you change the setting of Derived Variable , all existing concentration matrices will be deleted from transmitter memory. Set Derived Variable before loading concentration matrices.
5. Load one or more matrices.
a) Set Matrix Being Configured to the location to which the matrix will be loaded.
b) Click Load Matrix from a File , navigate to the matrix file on your computer, and load it.
c) Repeat until all required matrices are loaded.
6. Configure or review matrix data.
a) If necessary, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to configure or review, and click Change Matrix .
b) Set Concentration Unit to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
c) If you set Concentration Unit to Special, enter the custom label.
d) If desired, change the matrix name.
e) Review the data points for this matrix.
f) Do not change Reference Temperature or Curve Fit Maximum Order .
g) If you changed any matrix data, click Apply .
7. Set up extrapolation alarms.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If process density or process temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However, extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alarms are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is occurring.
a) If necessary, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to view, and select Change
Matrix .
b) Set Extrapolation Alarm Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alarm will be posted.
c) Enable or disable the high and low limit alarms for temperature and density, as desired, and select Apply .
Restriction
The high and low limit alarms require the enhanced core processor.
Example
If Extrapolation Alarm Limit is set to 5%, High Extrapolation Limit (Temperature) is enabled, and the matrix is built for a temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), an extrapolation alarm will be posted if process temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
8. Set Temperature Source to the method that the transmitter will use to obtain temperature data.
Option
Poll for external value
Description
The transmitter will poll an external temperature device, using
HART protocol over the primary mA Output.
Configuration and Use Manual 51
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option
Note
Not available on all transmitters.
Description
RTD
Static or Digital
Communications
The transmitter will use the temperature data from the sensor.
The transmitter will use the temperature value that it reads from memory.
• Static: The configured value is used. (Not recommended.)
• Digital Communications: A host writes transmitter data to transmitter memory.
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is implemented and the transmitter is secured, digital communications cannot be used to write temperature or pressure data to the transmitter.
9. If you chose RTD, no more configuration is required. Select Apply and exit.
10. If you chose to poll for temperature data: a) Select the Polling Slot to use.
b) Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary, and click Apply .
Tip
• Poll as Primary: No other HART masters will be on the network.
• Poll as Secondary: Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
c) Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external temperature device, and select Apply .
11. If you chose to use a static temperature value, set External Temperature to the value to use, and select
Apply .
12. If you want to use digital communications, select Apply , then perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
13. Set Active Matrix to the matrix to be used for measurement.
Concentration process variables are now available on the transmitter. You can view and report them in the same way that you view and report other process variables.
4.8.2 Configure concentration measurement using the Field
Communicator
Procedure
1. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → External Outputs .
52 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
2. Set Pressure Compensation to Enabled.
3. Enter Flow Cal Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
4. Enter Flow Press Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the flow factor is 0.000004% per PSI, enter -0.000004% per PSI.
5. Enter Dens Press Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3/PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the density factor is 0.000006 g/com3/PSI, enter -0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
6. Determine how the transmitter will obtain pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
A user-configured static pressure value
A value written by digital communications
Setup a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Set Compensation Pressure to the desired value.
a. Choose Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals .
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by choosing Service Tools → Variables → External
Variables and checking the value displayed for External Pressure .
4.8.3 Standard matrices for the concentration measurement application
The standard concentration matrices available from Micro Motion are applicable for a variety of process fluids.
These matrices are included in the ProLink III installation folder.
Tip
If the standard matrices are not appropriate for your application, you can build a custom matrix or purchase a custom matrix from Micro Motion.
Configuration and Use Manual 53
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Matrix name
Deg Balling
Deg Brix
Deg Plato
HFCS 42
HFCS 55
HFCS 90
Description Density unit
Matrix represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Balling.
For example, if a wort is 10 °Balling and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm 3 g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for sucrose solutions that indicates the percent by mass of sucrose in solution at a given temperature. For example,
40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of water results in a 40 °Brix solution.
g/cm 3 Matrix represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Plato. For example, if a wort is 10 °Plato and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 42 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 55 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm 3 Matrix represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 90 (high-fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
Temperature unit
°F
°C
°F
°C
°C
°C
Derived variable
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
4.8.4 Derived variables and calculated process variables
The concentration measurement application calculates a different set of process variables from each derived variable. The process variables are then available for viewing or reporting.
Calculated process variables
Derived variable
Density at Reference
Description
Mass/unit volume, corrected to a given reference temperature
Density at reference temp
✓
Standard volume flow rate
✓
Specific gravity
Concentration
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
54 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Derived variable
Description
Specific Gravity The ratio of the density of a process fluid at a given temperature to the density of water at a given temperature
Note
The two given temperature conditions do not need to be the same.
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Mass
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
Volume
Concentration
(Density)
Volume
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
Concentration
(Density)
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density
The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity
The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density
The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity
The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from reference density
The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from specific gravity
Calculated process variables
Density at reference temp
✓
Standard volume flow rate
✓
Specific gravity
✓
Concentration
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Configuration and Use Manual 55
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
4.9 Configure pressure compensation
Pressure compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the pressure effect on the sensor.
The pressure effect is the change in the sensor’s sensitivity to flow and density caused by the difference between the calibration pressure and the process pressure.
Tip
Not all sensors or applications require pressure compensation. The pressure effect for a specific sensor model can be found in the product data sheet located at Emerson.com
. If you are uncertain about implementing pressure compensation, contact customer service.
Prerequisites
You will need the flow factor, density factor, and calibration pressure values for your sensor.
• For the flow factor and density factor, see the product data sheet for your sensor.
• For the calibration pressure, see the calibration sheet for your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 PSI.
4.9.1 Configure pressure compensation using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure Compensation .
2. Set Pressure Compensation Status to Enabled.
3. Set Pressure Unit to the appropriate unit.
If you will use an external pressure value, set Pressure Unit to match the pressure unit used by the external pressure device.
4. Enter Flow Calibration Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
5. Enter Flow Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the flow factor is 0.000004 % per PSI, enter −0.000004 % per PSI .
6. Enter Density Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm 3 sign.
/PSI. When entering the value, reverse the
Example
If the density factor is − 0.000006 g/cm 3 /PSI, enter +0.000006
g/cm 3 /PSI.
7. Set Pressure Source to the method that the transmitter will use to obtain pressure data.
56 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Option
Poll for external value
Fixed Value or Digital
Communications
Description
The transmitter will poll an external pressure device, using HART ® protocol over the primary mA Output.
The transmitter will use the pressure value that it reads from memory.
• Fixed Value: The configured value is used.
• Digital Communications: A host writes transmitter data to transmitter memory.
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is implemented and the transmitter is secured, digital communications cannot be used to write temperature or pressure data to the transmitter.
8. If you chose to poll for pressure data: a) Select the Polling Slot to use.
b) Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary, and click Apply .
Tip
• Poll as Primary: No other HART masters will be on the network.
• Poll as Secondary: Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
c) Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device, and click Apply .
d) Ensure that the primary mA Output is wired to support HART communications with the external pressure device.
9. If you chose to use a fixed pressure value: a) Set Fixed Value to the value to use, and click Apply
10. If you want to use digital communications, click Apply , then perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by checking the External Pressure value displayed in the Inputs area of the main window.
4.9.2 Configure pressure compensation using the Field
Communicator
Procedure
1. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → External Pressure/Temperature
→ Pressure .
Configuration and Use Manual 57
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
2. Set Pressure Compensation to Enabled.
3. Enter Flow Cal Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
4. Enter Flow Press Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the flow factor is − 0.0002 % per PSI, enter +0.0002
% per PSI.
5. Enter Dens Press Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm 3 sign.
/PSI. When entering the value, reverse the
Example
If the density factor is − 0.000006 g/cm 3 /PSI, enter +0.000006
g/cm 3 /PSI.
6. Determine how the transmitter will obtain pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
A user-configured static pressure value
Setup a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Set Compensation Pressure to the desired value.
Polling for pressure a. Ensure that the primary mA Output has been wired to support HART polling.
® b. Choose Online → Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements →
External Pressure/Temperature → External Polling .
c. Set Poll Control to Poll As Primary Host or Poll as Secondary Host.
d. Choose an unused polling slot.
e. Set External Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device.
f. Set Polled Variable to Pressure.
Tip
• Poll as Primary: No other HART masters will be on the network.
• Poll as Secondary: Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field
Communicator is not a HART master.
A value written by digital communications a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
58 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Option Setup
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is implemented and the transmitter is secured, digital communications cannot be used to write temperature or pressure data to the transmitter.
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by choosing Service Tools → Variables → External
Variables and checking the value displayed for External Pressure .
4.9.3 Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Pressure Measurement Unit . Different communications tools may use different labels for the units. In most applications, Pressure Measurement
Unit should be set to match the pressure measurement unit used by the remote device.
Unit description
Feet water @ 68 °F
Inches water @ 4 °C
Inches water @ 60 °F
Inches water @ 68 °F
Millimeters water @ 4 °C
Millimeters water @ 68 °F
Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
Inches mercury @ 0 °C
Pounds per square inch
Bar
Millibar
Grams per square centimeter
Kilograms per square centimeter
Pascals
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0 °C
Atmospheres
INHG
PSI
BAR mBAR
G/SCM
KG/SCM
PA
KPA
Display
FTH
2
O
INW4C
INW60
INH
2
O mmW4C mmH
2
O mmHG
MPA
TORR
ATM
ProLink III
Label
Ft Water @ 68 °F
In Water @ 4 °C
In Water @ 60 °F
In Water @ 68 °F mm Water @ 4 °C mm Water @ 68 °F mm Mercury @ 0 °C
In Mercury @ 0 °C
PSI bar millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 pascals
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0 °C atms
Field Communicator ftH
2
O inH
2
O @4DegC inH
2
O @60DegF inH
2
O mmH
2
O @4DegC mmH
2
O mmHg inHG psi bar mbar g/Sqcm kg/Sqcm
Pa kPa
MPa torr atms
Configuration and Use Manual 59
Configure process measurement
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
60 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
5 Configure device options and preferences
5.1 Configure the transmitter display
You can control the process variables shown on the display and a variety of display behaviors.
5.1.1 Configure the language used for the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → LANG
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Language
Display Language controls the language used for process data and menus on the display.
Procedure
Select the language you want to use.
The languages available depend on your transmitter model and version.
5.1.2 Configure the process variables and diagnostic variables shown on the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variables
You can control the process variables and diagnostic variables shown on the display, and the order in which they appear. The display can scroll through up to 15 variables in any order you choose. In addition, you can repeat variables or leave slots unassigned.
Restriction
• You cannot set Display Variable 1 to None or to a diagnostic variable. Display Variable 1 must be set to a process variable.
• If you have configured Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA Output, you cannot change the setting of Display Variable 1 using this procedure. To change the setting of Display Variable 1 , you must change the configuration of mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output.
Note
If you configure a display variable as a volume process variable and then change Volume Flow Type , the display variable is automatically changed to the equivalent process variable. For example, Volume Flow Rate would be changed to Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate.
Procedure
For each display variable you want to change, assign the process variable you want to use.
Configuration and Use Manual 61
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Default display variable configuration
Display variable
Display Variable 1
Display Variable 2
Display Variable 3
Display Variable 4
Display Variable 5
Display Variable 6
Display Variable 7
Display Variable 8
Display Variable 9
Display Variable 10
Display Variable 11
Display Variable 12
Display Variable 13
Display Variable 14
Display Variable 15
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Process variable assignment
Mass flow
Mass total
Volume flow
Volume total
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
Configure Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA Output
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → DISPLAY VAR 1 → AO 1 SRC
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Not available
You can configure Display Variable 1 to track mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output. When tracking is enabled, you can control Display Variable 1 from the display menu.
Tip
This feature is the only way to configure a display variable from the display menus, and it applies only to
Display Variable 1 .
Procedure
Configure Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA Output.
Display Variable 1 will automatically be set to match mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA
Output. If you change the configuration of mA Output Process Variable , Display Variable 1 will be updated automatically.
5.1.3 Configure the number of decimal places (precision) shown on the display
Display Not available
62 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Decimal Places
You can specify the number of decimal places (precision) that are shown on the display for each process variable or diagnostic variable. You can set the precision independently for each variable.
The display precision does not affect the actual value of the variable or the value used in calculations.
Procedure
1. Select a variable.
2. Set Number of Decimal Places to the number of decimal places you want shown when the process variable or diagnostic variable appears on the display.
For temperature and density process variables, the default value is 2 decimal places. For all other variables, the default value is 4 decimal places. The range is 0 to 5.
Tip
The lower the precision, the greater the change must be for it to be reflected on the display. Do not set the precision too low or too high to be useful.
5.1.4 Configure the refresh rate of data shown on the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → RATE
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variable Menu Features → Refresh Rate
You can set Refresh Rate to control how frequently data is refreshed on the display.
Procedure
Set Refresh Rate to the desired value.
The default value is 200 milliseconds. The range is 100 milliseconds to 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds).
5.1.5 Enable or disable automatic scrolling through the display variables
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → AUTO SCRLL
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variable Menu Features → Auto Scroll
You can configure the display to automatically scroll through the configured display variables or to show a single display variable until the operator activates Scroll . When you set automatic scrolling, you can also configure the length of time each display variable is displayed.
Procedure
1. Enable or disable Auto Scroll as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual 63
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option
Enabled
Disabled
(default)
Description
The display automatically scrolls through each display variable as specified by Scroll
Rate . The operator can move to the next display variable at any time using Scroll .
The display shows Display Variable 1 and does not scroll automatically. The operator can move to the next display variable at any time using Scroll .
2. If you enabled Auto Scroll , set Scroll Rate as desired.
The default value is 10 seconds.
Tip
Scroll Rate may not be available until you apply Auto Scroll .
5.1.6 Enable or disable the display backlight
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → BKLT
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Backlight
You can enable or disable the display backlight.
Procedure
Enable or disable Backlight .
The default setting is Enabled.
5.1.7 Enable or disable Status LED Blinking
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variable Menu Features → Status LED Blinking
By default, the status LED blinks (flashes) to indicate unacknowledged alerts. If you disable Status LED
Blinking , the status LED does not blink, whether alerts are acknowledged or not. It still changes color to indicate active alerts.
Procedure
Enable or disable Status LED Blinking .
The default setting is Enabled.
64 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
5.2 Enable or disable operator actions from the display
You can configure the transmitter to let the operator perform specific actions using the display.
5.2.1 Enable or disable Totalizer Start/Stop from the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → TOTALS STOP
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Control Methods
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variable Menu Features → Start/Stop Totals
You can control whether or not the operator is able to start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display.
Restriction
• You cannot start and stop totalizers individually from the display. All totalizers are started or stopped together.
• You cannot start or stop inventories separately from totalizers. When a totalizer is started or stopped, the associated inventory is also started or stopped.
• If the petroleum measurement application is installed, the operator must enter the off-line password to perform this function, even if the off-line password is not enabled.
Procedure
1. Ensure that at least one totalizer is configured as a display variable.
2. Enable or disable Totalizer Reset as desired.
Option
Enabled
Description
Operators can start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display, if at least one totalizer is configured as a display variable.
Disabled (default) Operators cannot start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display.
5.2.2 Enable or disable Totalizer Reset from the display
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → TOTALS RESET
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Control Methods
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Display Variable Menu Features → Totalizer Reset
You can configure whether or not the operator is able to reset totalizers from the display.
Restriction
• This parameter does not apply to inventories. You cannot reset inventories from the display.
• You cannot use the display to reset all totalizers as a group. You must reset totalizers individually.
Configuration and Use Manual 65
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• If the petroleum measurement application is installed, the operator must enter the off-line password to perform this function, even if the off-line password is not enabled.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the totalizers you want to reset have been configured as display variables.
If the totalizer is not configured as a display variable, the operator will not be able to reset it.
2. Enable or disable resetting the totalizer as desired.
Option Description
Enabled Operators can reset a totalizer from the display, if the totalizer is configured as a display variable.
Disabled (default) Operators cannot reset totalizers from the display.
5.2.3 Enable or disable the Acknowledge All Alerts display command
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY → DISPLAY ACK
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Ack All
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Offline Variable Menu Features → Acknowledge All
You can configure whether or not the operator can use a single command to acknowledge all alerts from the display.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the alert menu is accessible from the display.
To acknowledge alerts from the display, operators must have access to the alert menu.
2. Enable or disable Acknowledge All Alerts as desired.
Option Description
Enabled (default) Operators can use a single display command to acknowledge all alerts at once.
Disabled Operators cannot acknowledge all alerts at once. Each alert must be acknowledged separately.
5.3 Configure security for the display menus
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → DISPLAY
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Configure → Manual Setup → Display → Offline Variable Menu Features
66 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
You can control operator access to different sections of the display off-line menu. You can also configure a password to control access.
Procedure
1. To control operator access to the maintenance section of the off-line menu, enable or disable Off-Line
Menu .
Option Description
Enabled (default) Operator can access the maintenance section of the off-line menu. This access is required for configuration and calibration, but is not required to view alerts or to access Smart Meter Verification (if applicable).
Disabled Operator cannot access the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
2. To control operator access to the alert menu, enable or disable Alert Menu .
Option Description
Enabled (default) Operator can access the alert menu. This access is required to view and acknowledge alerts, but is not required for Smart Meter Verification (if applicable), configuration, or calibration.
Disabled Operator cannot access the alert menu.
Note
The transmitter status LED changes color to indicate that there are active alerts, but does not show specific alerts.
3. To require a password for access to the maintenance section of the off-line menu and the Smart Meter
Verification menu, enable or disable Off-Line Password .
Option
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Description
Operator is prompted for the off-line password at entry to the Smart Meter
Verification menu (if applicable), or entry to the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
No password is required for entry to the Smart Meter Verification menu (if applicable) or entry to the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
4. To require a password to access the alert menu, enable or disable Alert Password .
Option
Enabled
Description
Operator is prompted for the off-line password at entry to the alert menu.
Disabled (default) No password is required for entry to the alert menu.
If both Off-Line Password and Alert Password are enabled, the operator is prompted for the off-line password to access the off-line menu, but is not prompted thereafter.
5. Set Off-Line Password to the desired value.
Configuration and Use Manual 67
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
The default value is 1234. The range is 0000 to 9999.
The same value is used for both the off-line password and the alert password.
Tip
Record your password for future reference.
5.4 Configure response time parameters
You can configure the rate at which process data is polled and process variables are calculated.
5.4.1 Configure Update Rate
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response → Update Rate
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Update Rate
Update Rate controls the rate at which process data is polled and process variables are calculated. Update
Rate = Special produces faster and “noisier” response to changes in the process. Do not use Special mode unless required by your application.
Prerequisites
Before setting Update Rate to Special:
• Check the effects of Special mode on specific process variables.
• Contact customer support.
Tip
For systems with a standard core processor, Special mode can improve performance for applications with entrained air or Empty-Full-Empty conditions. This does not apply to systems with an enhanced core processor.
Procedure
1. Set Update Rate as desired.
Option Description
Normal All process data is polled at the rate of 20 times per second (20 Hz).
All process variables are calculated at 20 Hz.
This option is appropriate for most applications.
Special A single, user-specified process variable is polled at the rate of 100 times per second
(100 Hz). Other process data is polled at 6.25 Hz. Some process, diagnostic, and calibration data is not polled.
All available process variables are calculated at 100 Hz.
Use this option only if required by your application.
If you change Update Rate , the settings for Flow Damping , and Density Damping are automatically adjusted.
68 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
2. If you set Update Rate to Special, select the process variable to be polled at 100 Hz.
Effects of Update Rate = Special
Incompatible features and functions
Special mode is not compatible with the following features and functions:
• Enhanced events. Use basic events instead.
• All calibration procedures.
• Zero verification.
• Restoring the factory zero or the prior zero.
If required, you can switch to Normal mode, perform the desired procedures, and then return to Special mode.
Process variable updates
Some process variables are not updated when Special mode is enabled.
Table 5-1: Special mode and process variable updates
Always polled and updated
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Gas standard volume flow
• Density
• Temperature
• Drive gain
• LPO amplitude
• Status [contains Event 1 and Event
2 (basic events)]
• Mass total
• Volume total
• Live zero
• Gas standard volume total
• Temperature-corrected volume total
• Temperature-corrected density
• Temperature-corrected volume flow
• Batch-weighted average temperature
• Batch-weighted average density
Updated only when the petroleum measurement application is disabled
• RPO amplitude
• Core input voltage
• Mass inventory
• Volume inventory
• Gas standard volume inventory
Never updated
All other process variables and calibration data. They retain the values held at the time you enabled Special mode.
Configuration and Use Manual 69
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
5.4.2 Configure Response Time
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response → Response Time
Not available
Response Time is used to apply a different algorithm to the calculation of process variables from the raw process data.
Restriction
Response Time is available only on systems with the enhanced core processor.
Procedure
Set Response Time as desired.
Option
Normal (Legacy)
Description
Transmitter calculates process variables at the standard speed. This option is selected if this parameter was configured on an earlier version of ProLink III software.
Special (Legacy) Transmitter calculates process variables at a faster speed. This option is selected if this parameter was configured on an earlier version of ProLink III software.
Normal - Optimal Filtering Transmitter calculates process variables at standard filtering and speed.
Transmitter calculates process variables at the fastest speed.
Low Filtering - Fastest
Response
High Filtering - Smoothest
Output
Service
Transmitter calculates process variables at the smoothest (least noisy) response to changes in the process.
For factory use only.
5.5 Configure alert handling
The alert handling parameters control the transmitter’s response to process and device conditions.
5.5.1 Configure Fault Timeout
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
Configure → Alert Setup → Alert Severity → Fault Timeout
Fault Timeout controls the delay before fault actions are performed.
Restriction
Fault Timeout is applied only to the following alerts (listed by Status Alert Code): A003, A004, A005, A008,
A016, A017, A033. For all other alerts, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert is detected.
70 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Procedure
Set Fault Timeout as desired.
The default value is 0 seconds. The range is 0 to 60 seconds.
If you set Fault Timeout to 0, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert condition is detected.
The fault timeout period begins when the transmitter detects an alert condition. During the fault timeout period, the transmitter continues to report its last valid measurements.
If the fault timeout period expires while the alert is still active, the fault actions are performed. If the alert condition clears before the fault timeout expires, no fault actions are performed.
5.5.2 Configure Status Alert Severity
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Alert Severity
Configure → Alert Setup → Alert Severity → Set Alert Severity
Use Status Alert Severity to control the fault actions that the transmitter performs when it detects an alert condition.
Restriction
• For some alerts, Status Alert Severity is not configurable.
• For some alerts, Status Alert Severity can be set only to two of the three options.
Tip
Use the default settings for Status Alert Severity unless you have a specific requirement to change them.
Procedure
1. Select a status alert.
2. For the selected status alert, set Status Alert Severity as desired.
Option
Fault
Description
Actions when fault is detected:
• The alert is posted to the Alert List.
• Outputs go to the configured fault action (after Fault Timeout has expired, if applicable).
• Digital communications go to the configured fault action (after Fault Timeout has expired, if applicable).
• The status LED (if available) changes to red or yellow (depending on alert severity).
Actions when alert clears:
• Outputs return to normal behavior.
• Digital communications return to normal behavior.
• The status LED (if available) returns to green and may or may not flash.
Configuration and Use Manual 71
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option Description
Informational Actions when fault is detected:
• The alert is posted to the Alert List.
• The status LED (if available) changes to red or yellow (depending on alert severity).
Actions when alert clears:
• The status LED (if available) returns to green and may or may not flash.
Ignore No action
A002
A003
A004
A005
A006
A008
A009
Status alerts and options for Status Alert Severity
Table 5-2: Status alerts and Status Alert Severity
Alert code
A001
A010
A011
A012
A013
A014
A016
A017
A018
A019
A020
A021
A022
Status message
EEPROM Error (Core
Processor)
Default severity Notes
Fault
RAM Error (Core Processor) Fault
No Sensor Response Fault
Temperature Overrange Fault
Mass Flow Rate Overrange Fault
Characterization Required Fault
Density Overrange Fault
Fault Transmitter Initializing/
Warming Up
Calibration Failure Fault
Fault Zero Calibration Failed:
Low
Zero Calibration Failed:
High
Fault
Zero Calibration Failed:
Unstable
Transmitter Failure
Fault
Sensor RTD Failure
T-Series RTD Failure
EEPROM Error
(Transmitter)
RAM Error (Transmitter)
Fault
Fault
Fault
Fault
No Flow Cal Value
Fault
Fault
Incorrect Sensor Type (K1) Fault
Configuration Database
Corrupt (Core Processor)
Fault Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Configurable?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
72 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Table 5-2: Status alerts and Status Alert Severity (continued)
Alert code
A023
A024
A025
A026
A027
A028
A031
A032
A033
A034
A035
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
Status message
Internal Totals Corrupt
(Core Processor)
Program Corrupt (Core
Processor)
Boot Sector Fault (Core
Processor)
Sensor/Transmitter
Communications Failure
Security Breach
Core Processor Write
Failure
Low Power
Meter Verification in
Progress: Outputs to Fault
Insufficient Right/Left
Pickoff Signal
Meter Verification Failed
Meter Verification Aborted Fault mA Output 1 Saturated mA Output 1 Fixed
Drive Overrange
Data Loss Possible (Totals and Inventories)
Calibration in Progress
Slug Flow
Default severity Notes
Fault Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Fault
Fault
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Fault
Configurable?
No
No
No
No
Fault
Fault
Fault
Varies
Fault
Fault
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
No
No
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
If outputs are set to Last Measured
Value, severity is Info. If outputs are set to Fault, severity is Fault.
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Yes
Yes
Configuration and Use Manual 73
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 5-2: Status alerts and Status Alert Severity (continued)
Alert code
A106
A107
A108
A109
A110
A111
A112
A113
A114
A115
A118
Status message
Burst Mode Enabled
Power Reset Occurred
Basic Event 1 On
Basic Event 2 On
Frequency Output
Saturated
Frequency Output Fixed
Upgrade Transmitter
Software mA Output 2 Saturated mA Output 2 Fixed
No External Input or Polled
Data
Discrete Output 1 Fixed
Default severity Notes
Informational Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Informational
Informational
Informational
Normal transmitter behavior; occurs after every power cycle.
Applies only to basic events.
Informational
Applies only to basic events.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Applies only to systems with transmitter software earlier than v5.0.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Informational
Informational
A119
A120
A121
A131
A132
Discrete Output 2 Fixed
Curve Fit Failure
(Concentration)
Extrapolation Alarm
(Concentration)
Meter Verification in
Progress: Outputs to Last
Measured Value
Sensor Simulation Active
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Applies only to transmitters with the concentration measurement application.
Applies only to transmitters with the concentration measurement application.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
Configurable?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
To Informational or Ignore only
74 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Table 5-2: Status alerts and Status Alert Severity (continued)
Alert code
A141
Status message
DDC trigger(s) have completed
Default severity Notes
Informational Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to
Fault.
Configurable?
Yes
5.6 Configure informational parameters
The informational parameters can be used to identify or describe your meter. They are not used in process measurement and they are not required.
5.6.1 Configure Sensor Serial Number
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Sensor
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Sensor Information → Sensor Serial Number
Sensor Serial Number lets you store the serial number of the sensor component of your flowmeter in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1. Obtain the sensor serial number from your sensor tag.
2. Enter the serial number in the Sensor Serial Number field.
5.6.2 Configure Sensor Material
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Sensor
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Sensor Information → Tube Wetted Material
Sensor Material lets you store the type of material used for your sensor’s wetted parts in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1. Obtain the material used for your sensor’s wetted parts from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2. Set Sensor Material to the appropriate option.
5.6.3 Configure Sensor Liner Material
Display Not available
Configuration and Use Manual 75
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Sensor
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Sensor Information → Tube Lining
Sensor Liner Material lets you store the type of material used for your sensor liner in transmitter memory.
This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1. Obtain your sensor’s liner material from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2. Set Sensor Liner Material to the appropriate option.
5.6.4 Configure Sensor Flange Type
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Sensor
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Sensor Information → Sensor Flange
Sensor Flange Type lets you store your sensor’s flange type in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1. Obtain your sensor’s flange type from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2. Set Sensor Flange Type to the appropriate option.
5.6.5 Configure Descriptor
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Transmitter
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Transmitter Info → Descriptor
Descriptor lets you store a description in transmitter memory. The description is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
Enter a description for the transmitter or device
You can use up to 16 characters for the description.
5.6.6 Configure Message
Display
ProLink III
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Transmitter
76 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Field Communicator Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Transmitter Info → Message
Message lets you store a short message in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
Enter a short message for the transmitter or device.
Your message can be up to 32 characters long.
5.6.7 Configure Date
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Transmitter
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Transmitter Info → Date
Date lets you store a static date (not updated by the transmitter) in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
Enter the date you want to use, in the form mm/dd/yyyy .
Tip
ProLink III provides a calendar tool to help you select the date.
Configuration and Use Manual 77
Configure device options and preferences
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
78 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
6 Integrate the meter with the control system
6.1 Configure the transmitter channels
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Channels → Channel B
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Channels → Channel C
You can configure the channels on your transmitter to operate in several ways. The channel configuration must match the wiring at the transmitter terminals.
Prerequisites
To avoid causing process errors:
• Configure the channels before configuring the outputs.
• Before changing the channel configuration, ensure that all control loops affected by the channel are under manual control.
Important
Before configuring a channel to operate as a Discrete Input, check the status of the remote input device and the actions assigned to the Discrete Input. If the Discrete Input is ON, all actions assigned to the Discrete
Input will be performed when the new channel configuration is implemented. If this is not acceptable, change the state of the remote device or wait to configure the channel as a Discrete Input until an appropriate time.
Note
Channel A always operates as an internally-powered mA Output. If Channel B is configured as an mA Output, it is internally powered.
Important
If you need both a Frequency Output and a Discrete Output, you must first configure Channel B as the
Frequency Output, then configure Channel C as the Discrete Output. Other combinations are invalid and will be rejected by the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Set Channel B as desired.
Option
Secondary mA Output
Frequency Output
Discrete Output
Description
Channel B will operate as an mA Output.
Channel B will operate as a Frequency Output.
Channel B will operate as a Discrete Output.
Configuration and Use Manual 79
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
2. If you set Channel B to operate as a Frequency Output or Discrete Output, configure the power source for the channel.
Option
Internal (Active)
External (Passive)
Description
The channel is powered by the transmitter.
The channel is powered by an external power source.
3. Set Channel C as desired.
Option
Frequency Output
Discrete Output
Discrete Input
Description
Channel C will operate as a Frequency Output.
Channel C will operate as a Discrete Output.
Channel C will operate as a Discrete Input.
4. Configure the power source for Channel C.
Option
Internal (Active)
External (Passive)
Description
The channel is powered by the transmitter.
The channel is powered by an external power source.
Postrequisites
For each channel that you configured, perform or verify the corresponding input or output configuration.
When the configuration of a channel is changed, the channel’s behavior will be controlled by the configuration that is stored for the selected input or output type, and the stored configuration may not be appropriate for your process.
After verifying channel and output configuration, return the control loop to automatic control.
6.2 Configure the mA Output
The mA Output is used to report the configured process variable. The mA Output parameters control how the process variable is reported.
Your transmitter may have one or two mA Outputs:
• Channel A is always an mA Output (the primary mA Output).
• Channel B can be configured as an mA Output (the secondary mA Output).
Important
Whenever you change an mA Output parameter, verify all other mA Output parameters before returning the meter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
80 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
6.2.1 Configure mA Output Process Variable
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH A → AO 1 SRC
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET MAO → AO 2 SRC
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → Primary Variable
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → Secondary Variable
Use mA Output Process Variable to select the variable that is reported over the mA Output. The mA and
Frequency Outputs are configured independently. You can assign one process variable to the mA Output and a different process variable to the Frequency Output.
Prerequisites
• If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
• If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, ensure that the concentration measurement application is configured so that the desired variable is available.
• If you are using the HART variables, be aware that changing the configuration of mA Output Process
Variable will change the configuration of the HART Primary Variable (PV) and/or the HART Secondary
Variable (SV).
• If you have configured Display Variable 1 to track mA Output Process Variable , be aware that changing the configuration of mA Output Process Variable will change the contents of Display Variable 1 .
Procedure
Set mA Output Process Variable as desired.
Default settings are as follows:
• Primary mA Output: Mass Flow Rate
• Secondary mA Output: Density
Postrequisites
If you changed the setting of mA Output Process Variable , verify the settings of Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV).
Options for mA Output Process Variable
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for mA Output Process Variable , plus several applicationspecific options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Table 6-1: Standard mA Output process variables
Process variable
Density
Drive gain
External pressure
Display
DENS
DGAIN
EXT P
Label
ProLink III
Density
Drive Gain
External Pressure
Field Communicator
Dens
Driv signl
External pres
Configuration and Use Manual 81
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 6-1: Standard mA Output process variables (continued)
Process variable
External temperature
Gas standard volume flow rate
Mass flow rate
Temperature
Volume flow rate
Display
EXT T
GSV F
MFLOW
TEMP
VFLOW
Label
ProLink III
External Temperature
Gas Standard Volume Flow
Rate
Mass Flow Rate
Temperature
Volume Flow Rate
Field Communicator
External temp
Gas vol flo
Mass flo
Temp
Vol flo
Table 6-2: Petroleum measurement mA Output process variables
Process variable
Display
Average corrected density AVE D
Average temperature
Temperature-corrected
(standard) volume flow rate
Temperature-corrected density
AVE T
TCVOL
TCDEN
Label
ProLink III
Average Density
Average Temperature
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Density at Reference
Temperature
Field Communicator
TC Avg Dens
TC Avg Temp
TC Vol
TC Dens
Table 6-3: Concentration measurement mA Output process variables
Process variable
Baume
Concentration
Density at reference
Display
BAUME
CONC
RDENS
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
NET M
NET V
Specific gravity SGU
Standard volume flow rate STD V
Label
ProLink III
Baume
Concentration
Density at Reference
Temperature
Net Mass Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Density (Fixed SG Units)
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Field Communicator
ED Dens (Baume)
ED Concentration
ED Dens at Ref
ED Net Mass flo
ED Net Vol flo
ED Dens (SGU)
ED Std Vol flo
Table 6-4: Fuel consumption mA Output process variables
Process variable
Differential mass flow
Display
DFLOW
Label
ProLink III Field Communicator
Differential Mass Flow Rate Differential Mass Flow Rate
82 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Table 6-5: PVR mA Output process variables
Process variable
Uncorrected oil flow
Uncorrected water cut
Uncorrected water flow
Corrected oil flow
Corrected water cut
Corrected water flow
Display
OIL
WATER%
WATER
OIL60
WCT60%
WTR60
Shrinkage factor corrected net oil at line
Shrinkage factor corrected net oil at 60F
Shrinkage factor corrected volume of mix at 60F
SFOIL
SFO60
SFM60
ProLink III
Label
Oil Flow Rate At Line
Water Cut At Line
Water Flow Rate At Line
Field Communicator
Oil Flow Rate at Line
Water Cut at Line
Water Flow Rate at Line
Oil Flow Rate At Reference Oil Flow Rate at Reference
Water Cut At Reference Water Cut at Reference
Water Flow Rate At
Reference
SF Oil Flow Rate At Line
SF Oil Flow Rate At
Reference
SF Volume Flow Rate At
Reference
Water Flow Rate at
Reference
Shrinkage Factor Oil Flow
Rate at Line
Shrinkage Factor Oil Flow
Rate at Reference
Shrinkage Factor Volume
Flow Rate at Reference
6.2.2 Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value
(URV)
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH A → AO 1 4 mA
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH A → AO 1 20 mA
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET MAO → AO 2 4 mA
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET MAO → AO 2 20 mA
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → mA Output Settings → PV LRV
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → mA Output Settings → PV URV
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → mA Output Settings → SV LRV
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → mA Output Settings → SV URV
The Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) are used to scale the mA Output, that is, to define the relationship between mA Output Process Variable and the mA Output level.
Prerequisites
Ensure that mA Output Process Variable is set to the desired process variable. Each process variable has its own set of LRV and URV values. When you change the values of LRV and URV , you are configuring values for the currently assigned mA Output process variable.
Ensure that the measurement unit for the configured process variable has been set as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual 83
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Note
For transmitter software v5.0 and later, if you change LRV and URV from the factory default values, and you later change mA Output Process Variable , LRV and URV will not reset to the default values.
For example, if you set mA Output Process Variable to Mass Flow Rate and change the LRV and URV , then you set mA Output Process Variable to Density, and finally you change mA Output Process Variable back to
Mass Flow Rate, LRV and URV for Mass Flow Rate reset to the values that you configured. In earlier versions of the transmitter software, LRV and URV reset to the factory default values.
Procedure
Set LRV and URV as desired.
• LRV is the value of mA Output Process Variable represented by an output of 4 mA. The default value for
LRV depends on the setting of mA Output Process Variable . Enter LRV in the measurement units that are configured for mA Output Process Variable .
• URV is the value of mA Output Process Variable represented by an output of 20 mA. The default value for
URV depends on the setting of mA Output Process Variable . Enter URV in the measurement units that are configured for mA Output Process Variable .
The mA Output uses a range of 4–20 mA to represent mA Output Process Variable . Between LRV and URV , the mA Output is linear with the process variable. If the process variable drops below LRV or rises above URV , the transmitter posts an output saturation alert.
Default values for Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV)
Each option for mA Output Process Variable has its own LRV and URV . If you change the configuration of mA
Output Process Variable , the corresponding LRV and URV are loaded and used.
Table 6-6: Default values for Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV)
Process variable
All mass flow variables
All liquid volume flow variables
All density variables
All temperature variables
Drive gain
Gas standard volume flow
External temperature
External pressure
Concentration
Baume
Specific gravity
LRV
–200.000 g/sec
–0.200 l/sec
0.000 g/cm 3
–240.000 °C
0.00%
–423.78 SCFM
–240.000 °C
0
0
0.000 bar
0%
URV
200.000 g/sec
0.200 l/sec
10.000 g/cm 3
450.000 °C
100.00%
423.78 SCFM
450.000 °C
100.000 bar
100%
10
10
6.2.3 Configure AO Cutoff
Display Not available
84 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → mA Output Settings → MAO
Cutoff
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → mA Output Settings → MAO
Cutoff
AO Cutoff (Analog Output Cutoff) specifies the lowest mass flow rate, volume flow rate, or gas standard volume flow rate that will be reported through the mA Output. Any flow rates below AO Cutoff will be reported as 0.
Restriction
AO Cutoff is applied only if mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, Volume Flow Rate, or Gas
Standard Volume Flow Rate. If mA Output Process Variable is set to a different process variable, AO Cutoff is not configurable, and the transmitter does not implement the AO cutoff function.
Procedure
Set AO Cutoff as desired.
The default values for AO Cutoff are as follows:
• Primary mA Output: 0.0 g/sec
• Secondary mA Output: Not-A-Number
Tip
For most applications, the default value of AO Cutoff should be used. Contact customer service before changing AO Cutoff .
Interaction between AO Cutoff and process variable cutoffs
When mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable (for example, mass flow rate or volume flow rate),
AO Cutoff interacts with Mass Flow Cutoff or Volume Flow Cutoff . The transmitter puts the cutoff into effect at the highest flow rate at which a cutoff is applicable.
Example: Cutoff interaction
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable = Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable = Mass Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff = 10 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff = 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, all outputs representing mass flow will report zero flow.
Example: Cutoff interaction
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable = Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable = Mass Flow Rate
Configuration and Use Manual 85
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• AO Cutoff = 15 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff = 10 g/sec
Result:
• If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate.
• If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow.
6.2.4 Configure Added Damping
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → mA Output Settings → PV Added
Damping
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → mA Output Settings → SV Added
Damping
Added Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the mA Output.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable. At the end of the interval, the internal value will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Added Damping affects the reporting of mA Output Process Variable through the mA Output only. It does not affect the reporting of that process variable via any other method (e.g., a Frequency Output or digital communications), or the value of the process variable used in calculations.
Note
Added Damping is not applied if the mA Output is fixed (for example, during loop testing) or if the mA
Output is reporting a fault. Added Damping is applied while sensor simulation is active.
Procedure
Set Added Damping to the desired value.
The default value is 0.0 seconds. The range is 0.0 to 440 seconds.
When you specify a value for Added Damping , the transmitter automatically rounds the value down to the nearest valid value.
Note
Added Damping values are affected by the setting of Update Rate and 100 Hz Variable .
Table 6-7: Valid values for Added Damping
Setting of Update Rate
Normal
Process variable
N/A
Update rate in effect
20 Hz
Valid values for Added Damping
0.0, 0.1, 0.3, 0.75, 1.6, 3.3, 6.5, 13.5, 27.5,
55, 110, 220, 440
86 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Table 6-7: Valid values for Added Damping (continued)
Setting of Update Rate
Special
Process variable
100 Hz variable (if assigned to the mA Output)
100 Hz variable (if not assigned to the mA Output)
All other process variables
Update rate in effect
100 Hz
6.25 Hz
Valid values for Added Damping
0.0, 0.04, 0.12, 0.30, 0.64, 1.32, 2.6, 5.4,
11, 22, 44, 88, 176, 350
0.0, 0.32, 0.96, 2.40, 5.12, 10.56, 20.8,
43.2, 88, 176, 352
Interaction between mA Output Damping and process variable damping
When mA Output Source is set to a flow rate variable, density, or temperature, mA Output Damping interacts with Flow Damping , Density Damping , or Temperature Damping . If multiple damping parameters are applicable, the effect of damping the process variable is calculated first, and the mA Output damping calculation is applied to the result of that calculation.
Example: Damping interaction
Configuration:
• Flow Damping = 1 second
• mA Output Source = Mass Flow Rate
• mA Output Damping = 2 seconds
Result: A change in the mass flow rate will be reflected in the mA Output over a time period that is greater than 3 seconds. The exact time period is calculated by the transmitter according to internal algorithms which are not configurable.
6.2.5 Configure mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault Level
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 1 → MA01 Fault Settings
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output 2 → MA02 Fault Settings mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set mA Output Fault Action to the desired value.
The default setting is Downscale.
Configuration and Use Manual 87
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Restriction
If Digital Communications Fault Action is set to NAN (not a number), you cannot set mA Output Fault
Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
2. If you set mA Output Fault Action to Upscale or Downscale, set mA Output Fault Level as desired.
Postrequisites
NOTICE
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data, and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Options for mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault Level
Option
Upscale
Downscale (default)
Internal Zero mA Output behavior
Goes to the configured fault level
Goes to the configured fault level mA Output Fault Level
Default: 22.0 mA
Range: 21.0 to 24.0 mA
Default: 2.0 mA
Range: 1.0 to 3.6 mA
Not applicable
None
Goes to the mA Output level associated with a process variable value of 0 (zero), as determined by Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value settings
Tracks data for the assigned process variable; no fault action
Not applicable
6.3 Configure the Frequency Output
The Frequency Output is used to report a process variable. The Frequency Output parameters control how the process variable is reported. Your transmitter may have zero, one, or two Frequency Outputs, depending on the configuration of Channels B and C. If both Channels B and C are configured as Frequency Outputs, they are electrically isolated but not independent. You cannot configure them separately.
Important
Whenever you change a Frequency Output parameter, verify all other Frequency Output parameters before returning the flowmeter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
6.3.1 Configure Frequency Output Process Variable
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET FO → FO SRC
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET FO → FO SRC
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output → FO Settings → Third Variable
88 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Frequency Output Process Variable controls the variable that is reported over the Frequency Output.
Prerequisites
If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, ensure that the concentration measurement application is configured so that the desired variable is available.
If you are using the HART variables, be aware that changing the configuration of Frequency Output Process
Variable will change the configuration of the HART Tertiary Variable (TV).
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Process Variable as desired.
The default setting is Mass Flow Rate.
Options for Frequency Output Process Variable
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for Frequency Output Process Variable , plus several application-specific options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Table 6-8: Standard FO process variables
Process variable
Gas standard volume flow rate
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Display
GSV F
MFLOW
VFLOW
Label
ProLink III
Gas Standard Volume Flow
Rate
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Field Communicator
Gas vol flo
Mass flo
Vol flo
Table 6-9: Petroleum measurement FO process variables
Process variable
Temperature-corrected
(standard) volume flow rate
Display
TCVOL
Label
ProLink III
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Table 6-10: Concentration measurement FO process variables
Process variable
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Display
NET M
NET V
Standard volume flow rate STD V
Label
ProLink III
Net Mass Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate at
Reference Temperature
Field Communicator
TC Vol
Field Communicator
ED Net Mass flo
ED Net Vol flo
ED Std Vol flo
Configuration and Use Manual 89
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 6-11: Fuel consumption FO process variables
Process variable
Differential mass flow
Label
Display ProLink III
Differential Mass Flow Rate Differential Mass Flow
Field Communicator
Differential Mass Flow Rate
6.3.2 Configure Frequency Output Polarity
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET FO → FO POLAR
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET FO → FO POLAR
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output → FO Settings → FO Polarity
Frequency Output Polarity controls how the output indicates the ON (active) state. The default value, Active
High, is appropriate for most applications. Your receiving device might require an Active Low setting.
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Polarity as desired.
The default setting is Active High.
Options for Frequency Output Polarity
Polarity option
Active High
Active Low
Reference voltage (OFF)
0
As determined by power supply, pull-up resistor, and load. See the installation manual for your transmitter.
Pulse voltage (ON)
As determined by power supply, pull-up resistor, and load. See the installation manual for your transmitter.
0
6.3.3 Configure Frequency Output Scaling Method
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET FO → FO SCALE
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET FO → FO SCALE
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output → FO Scaling
Frequency Output Scaling Method defines the relationship between output pulse and flow units. Set
Frequency Output Scaling Method as required by your frequency receiving device.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Scaling Method .
90 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Option
Frequency=Flow (default)
Pulses/Unit
Units/Pulse
Description
Frequency calculated from flow rate
A user-specified number of pulses represents one flow unit
A pulse represents a user-specified number of flow units
2. Set additional required parameters.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Frequency=Flow, set Rate Factor and Frequency
Factor .
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Pulses/Unit, define the number of pulses that will represent one flow unit.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Units/Pulse, define the number of units that each pulse will indicate.
For all scaling methods, the transmitter puts out a fixed number of pulses per unit, and at the same time, the Frequency Output signal varies in proportion to flowrate.
Calculate frequency from flow rate
The Frequency=Flow option is used to customize the Frequency Output for your application when you do not know appropriate values for Units/Pulse or Pulses/Unit.
If you specify Frequency=Flow, you must provide values for Rate Factor and Frequency Factor :
Rate Factor The maximum flow rate that you want the Frequency Output to report.
Frequency Factor A value calculated as follows:
× N where:
T Factor to convert selected time base to seconds
N Number of pulses per flow unit, as configured in the receiving device
The resulting Frequency Factor must be within the range of the Frequency Output 0 to 10,000 Hz:
• If Frequency Factor is less than 1 Hz, reconfigure the receiving device for a higher pulses/unit setting.
• If Frequency Factor is greater than 10,000 Hz, reconfigure the receiving device for a lower pulses/unit setting.
6.3.4 Configure Frequency Output Mode
Display
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET FO → FO MODE
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET FO → FO MODE
ProLink III
Field communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output
Not available
Configuration and Use Manual 91
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Frequency Output Mode defines the relationship between the two Frequency Outputs (dual-pulse mode).
Prerequisites
Before configuring Frequency Output Mode , ensure that both Channel B and Channel C are configured to operate as Frequency Outputs. If you do not have two Frequency Outputs on your transmitter, Frequency
Output Mode is set to Single and cannot be changed.
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Mode as desired.
The default value is Quadrature.
Options for Frequency Output Mode
Option
In-Phase
50% duty cycle
Channel behavior
Channel B
Channel C
Process condition
90° Phase Shift
50% duty cycle
–90° Phase Shift
50% duty cycle
Channel B
Channel C
Channel B
Channel C
180° Phase Shift
50% duty cycle
Quadrature
50% duty cycle
Channel B
Channel C
Channel B
Channel C
Channel B
Channel C
Forward flow
Channel C lags Channel B by 90°
Reverse flow
Channel C leads Channel B by 90°
Channel B
Channel C
Fault condition
Channel C is driven to 0
(1) Quadrature mode is used only for specific Weights & Measures applications where required by law.
6.3.5 Configure Frequency Output Fault Action and Frequency
Output Fault Level
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output → FO Fault Parameters → FO
Fault Action
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output → FO Fault Parameters → FO
Fault Level
92 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Fault Action as desired.
The default value is Downscale (0 Hz).
2. If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to Upscale, set Frequency Fault Level to the desired value.
The default value is 15000 Hz. The range is 10 to 15000 Hz.
Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Table 6-12: Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
All modes except Quadrature
Frequency output behavior
Quadrature mode
Goes to configured Upscale value:
• Range: 10 Hz to 15000 Hz
• Default: 15000 Hz
Channel B: Goes to configured Upscale value
Channel C: 0 Hz
Downscale
Internal Zero
None (default)
0 Hz
0 Hz
Tracks data for the assigned process variable; no fault action
Channel B: goes to configured Upscale value
Channel C: 0 Hz
Channel B: Goes to configured Upscale value
Channel C: 0 Hz
Channel B: Tracks data for the assigned process variable
Channel C: Tracks data for the assigned process variable
If your transmitter has two Frequency Outputs, their fault behavior is the same for all modes except
Quadrature.
NOTICE
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data, and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Restriction
If Digital Communications Fault Action is set to NAN (not a number), you cannot set mA Output Fault
Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Configuration and Use Manual 93
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
6.4 Configure the Discrete Output
The Discrete Output is used to report specific meter or process conditions. The Discrete Output parameters control which condition is reported and how it is reported. Your transmitter may have zero, one, or two
Discrete Outputs, depending on the configuration of Channels B and C. If both Channels B and C are configured as Discrete Output, they operate independently and you can configure them separately.
Restriction
Before you can configure the Discrete Output, you must configure a channel to operate as a Discrete Output.
Important
Whenever you change a Discrete Output parameter, verify all other Discrete Output parameters before returning the meter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
6.4.1 Configure Discrete Output Source
Display • OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET DO → DO 1 SRC
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET DO → DO 2 SRC
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 1 Assignment
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 2 Assignment
Discrete Output Source controls which device condition or process condition is reported via the Discrete
Output.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Source to the desired option.
Default settings for Discrete Output Source are as follows:
• Discrete Output 1: Flow Direction
• Discrete Output 2: Flow Switch, with Flow Switch Variable set to Mass Flow Rate, Flow Switch Setpoint set to 0.0
g/s, and Flow Switch Hysteresis set to 0.05
(5%).
Options for Discrete Output Source
Option Label
Discrete Event 1–
Display
D EV x
EVNT1
EVNT2
ProLink III
Enhanced Event 1
Enhanced Event 2
Enhanced Event 3
Enhanced Event 4
Enhanced Event 5
Event 1
Event 2
Field
Communicator
Discrete Event x
Event 1
Event 2
State
ON
OFF
ON
Discrete Output voltage
Site-specific
0 V
Site-specific
94 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Option
Flow Switch
Flow Direction
Calibration in
Progress
Fault
Display
E1OR2
FL SW
FLDIR
ZERO
FAULT
Label
ProLink III
Event 1 or Event 2
Status
Flow Switch
Indicator
Forward Reverse
Indicator
Calibration in
Progress
Fault Indication
State
Field
Communicator
Event 1 or Event
2
Flow Switch
OFF
ON
OFF
Forward/Reverse Forward flow
Reverse flow
Calibration in
Progress
ON
OFF
Fault ON
OFF
(1) Events configured using the enhanced event model.
(2) Events configured using the basic event model.
Discrete Output voltage
0 V
Site-specific
0 V
0 V
Site-specific
Site-specific
0 V
Site-specific
0 V
Important
If you assign Flow Switch to the Discrete Output, you should also configure Flow Switch Variable , Flow
Switch Setpoint , and Hysteresis .
Note
If your transmitter has two Discrete Outputs:
• You can configure them independently. For example, you can assign one to Flow Switch and one to Fault.
• If you assign both to Flow Switch, the same settings for Flow Switch Variable , Flow Switch Setpoint , and
Flow Switch Hysteresis will be implemented for both Discrete Outputs.
Related information
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
Configure Flow Switch parameters
Display • OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET DO → CONFIG FL SW
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET DO → CONFIG FL SW
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → Flow Switch Source
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → Flow Switch Setpoint
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → Hysteresis
Configuration and Use Manual 95
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Flow Switch is used to indicate that the flow rate (measured by the configured flow variable) has moved past the configured setpoint, in either direction. The flow switch is implemented with a user-configurable hysteresis.
Procedure
1. Set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, if you have not already done so.
2. Set Flow Switch Variable to the flow variable that you want to use to control the flow switch.
3. Set Flow Switch Setpoint to the value at which the flow switch will be triggered (after Hysteresis is applied).
• If the flow rate is below this value, the Discrete Output is ON.
• If the flow rate is above this value, the Discrete Output is OFF.
4. Set Hysteresis to the percentage of variation above and below the setpoint that will operate as a deadband.
Hysteresis defines a range around the setpoint within which the flow switch will not change. The default is 5%. The valid range is 0.1% to 10%.
Example
If Flow Switch Setpoint = 100 g/sec and Hysteresis = 5% , and the first measured flow rate is above
100 g/sec, the Discrete Output is OFF. It will remain OFF unless the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec. If this happens, the Discrete Output will turn ON, and remain ON until the flow rate rises above
105 g/sec. At this point it turns OFF and will remain OFF until the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec.
6.4.2 Configure Discrete Output Polarity
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH B → SET DO → DO 1 POLAR
• OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET DO → DO 2 POLAR
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 1 Polarity
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 2 Polarity
Discrete Outputs have two states: ON (active) and OFF (inactive). Two different voltage levels are used to represent these states. Discrete Output Polarity controls which voltage level represents which state.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Polarity as desired.
The default setting is Active High.
96 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Options for Discrete Output Polarity
Polarity option
Active High
Active Low
Discrete output power supply Description
Internal • When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides a pull-up to 15 V.
• When not asserted
(condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides
0 V.
External
Internal
• When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides a pull-up to a sitespecific voltage, maximum
30 V.
• When not asserted
(condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides
0 V.
• When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides 0 V.
• When not asserted
(condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides a pull-up to 15 V.
External • When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides 0 V.
• When not asserted
(condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides a pull-up to a site-specific voltage, to a maximum of
30 V.
6.4.3 Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 1 Fault Action
• Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output → DO 2 Fault Action
Configuration and Use Manual 97
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Discrete Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Discrete Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
NOTICE
Do not use Discrete Output Fault Action as a fault indicator. If you do, you may not be able to distinguish a fault condition from a normal operating condition. If you want to use the Discrete Output as a fault indicator, set Discrete Output Source to Fault and set Discrete Output Fault Action to None.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Fault Action as desired.
The default setting is None.
Related information
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
Options for Discrete Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
Discrete Output behavior
• Fault: Discrete Output is ON (site-specific voltage)
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Downscale
None (default)
• Fault: Discrete Output is OFF (0 V)
• No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
To indicate faults via a Discrete Output, set Discrete Output Source to Fault. Then, if a fault occurs, the
Discrete Output is always ON and the setting of Discrete Output Fault Action is ignored.
6.5 Configure the Discrete Input
The Discrete Input is used to initiate one or more transmitter actions from a remote input device. Your transmitter may have zero or one Discrete Input, depending on the configuration of Channel C.
The Discrete Input parameters include:
• Discrete Input Action
• Discrete Input Polarity
Important
Whenever you change a Discrete Input parameter, verify all other Discrete Input parameters before returning the flowmeter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
98 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
6.5.1 Configure Discrete Input Action
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET DI → DI ACT
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Action Assignment
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Input → DI Assignment
Discrete Input Action controls the action or actions that the transmitter will perform when the Discrete Input transitions from OFF to ON.
Important
Before assigning actions to an enhanced event or Discrete Input, check the status of the event or the remote input device. If it is ON, all assigned actions will be performed when the new configuration is implemented. If this is not acceptable, wait until an appropriate time to assign actions to the event or Discrete Input.
Procedure
1. Select an action.
2. Select the Discrete Input that will perform the selected action.
3. Repeat until you have assigned all the actions to be performed by the Discrete Input.
Options for Discrete Input Action
Action
Display
Standard
None (default)
Start sensor zero
Start/stop all totalizers
Reset mass total
Reset volume total
Reset gas standard volume total
NONE
START ZERO
START STOP
RESET MASS
RESET VOL
RESET GSVT
Reset all totals
Petroleum measurement
Reset volume total at reference temperature
RESET ALL
TCVOL
Concentration measurement
Reset CM reference volume total
RESET STD V
Reset CM net mass total RESET NET M
Reset CM net volume total RESET NET V
Increment CM matrix INCr CURVE
ProLink III
Label
None
Start Sensor Zero
Start/Stop All Totalization
Reset Mass Total
None
Perform auto zero
Start/stop totals
Reset mass total
Reset Volume Total Reset volume total
Reset Gas Std Volume Total Reset gas standard volume total
Reset All Totals Reset totals
Reset Volume Total at
Reference Temperature
Reset Volume Total at
Reference Temperature
Reset Net Mass Total
Reset Net Volume Total
Increment Concentration
Matrix
Field Communicator
Reset corrected volume total
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Configuration and Use Manual 99
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Action
Display
Meter verification
Start meter verification test START VERFY
ProLink III
Label
Start Meter Verification
Field Communicator
Not available
Important
Before assigning actions to an enhanced event or Discrete Input, check the status of the event or the remote input device. If it is ON, all assigned actions will be performed when the new configuration is implemented. If this is not acceptable, wait until an appropriate time to assign actions to the event or Discrete Input.
6.5.2 Configure Discrete Input Polarity
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CONFIG CH C → SET DI → DI POLAR
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Inputs → Discrete Input
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Input → DI Polarity
The Discrete Input has two states: ON and OFF. Discrete Input Polarity controls how the transmitter maps the incoming voltage level to the ON and OFF states.
Procedure
Set Discrete Input Polarity as desired.
The default setting is Active Low.
Options for Discrete Input Polarity
Polarity option
Active High
Discrete Input power supply
Internal
Active Low
External
Internal
External
Voltage
Voltage across terminals is high
Voltage across terminals is 0 VDC
Voltage applied across terminals is 3–30 VDC
Voltage applied across terminals is <0.8 VDC
Voltage across terminals is 0 VDC
Voltage across terminals is high
Voltage applied across terminals is <0.8 VDC
Voltage applied across terminals is 3–30 VDC
Status of discrete input at transmitter
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
100 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
6.6 Configure events
An event occurs when the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves past a user-defined setpoint. Events are used to provide notification of process changes or to perform specific transmitter actions if a process change occurs.
Your transmitter supports two event models:
• Basic event model
• Enhanced event model
6.6.1 Configure a basic event
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Basic Events
Not available
A basic event is used to provide notification of process changes. A basic event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint. You can define up to two basic events. Event status can be queried via digital communications, and a Discrete Output can be configured to report event status.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Specify Event Type .
Option
HI
LO
Description x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is greater than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is less than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
3. Assign a process variable to the event.
4. Set a value for Setpoint A .
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
6.6.2 Configure an enhanced event
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Enhanced Events
Configure → Alert Setup → Discrete Events
Configuration and Use Manual 101
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
An enhanced event is used to provide notification of process changes and, optionally, to perform specific transmitter actions if the event occurs. An enhanced event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a userspecified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint, or in range (IN) or out of range (OUT) with respect to two user-defined setpoints. You can define up to five enhanced events.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Specify Event Type .
Option
HI
LO
IN
OUT
Description x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is greater than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is less than the setpoint ( Setpoint A ), endpoint not included.
A ≤ x ≤ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is in range, that is, between Setpoint A and Setpoint B , endpoints included.
x ≤ A or x ≥ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable ( x ) is out of range, that is, less than Setpoint A or greater than Setpoint B , endpoints included.
3. Assign a process variable to the event.
4. Set values for the required setpoints.
• For HI and LO events, set Setpoint A .
• For IN and OUT events, set Setpoint A and Setpoint B .
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
6. Optional: Specify the action or actions that the transmitter will perform when the event occurs.
• With the display: OFF-LINE MAINT → OFF-LINE CONFG → IO → CH C → SET DI → DI ACT
• With ProLink III: Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Action Assignment
• With a field communicator: Configure → Alert Setup → Discrete Events → Assign Discrete Action
Options for Enhanced Event Action
Action
Display
Standard
None (default)
Start sensor zero
NONE
START ZERO
ProLink III
Label
None
Start Sensor Zero
Field Communicator
None
Perform auto zero
102 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Action
Start/stop all totalizers
Reset mass total
Reset volume total
Reset gas standard volume total
Display
START STOP
RESET MASS
RESET VOL
RESET GSVT
Reset all totals
Petroleum measurement
Reset volume total at reference temperature
RESET ALL
TCVOL
Concentration measurement
Reset CM reference volume total
RESET STD V
Reset CM net mass total RESET NET M
Reset CM net volume total RESET NET V
Increment CM matrix INCr CURVE
ProLink III
Label
Start/Stop All Totalization
Reset Mass Total
Reset Volume Total
Field Communicator
Start/stop totals
Reset mass total
Reset volume total
Reset Gas Std Volume Total Reset gas standard volume total
Reset All Totals Reset totals
Reset Volume Total at
Reference Temperature
Reset Volume Total at
Reference Temperature
Reset Net Mass Total
Reset Net Volume Total
Increment Concentration
Matrix
Reset corrected volume total
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Meter verification
Start meter verification test START VERFY Start Meter Verification Not available
Important
Before assigning actions to an enhanced event or Discrete Input, check the status of the event or the remote input device. If it is ON, all assigned actions will be performed when the new configuration is implemented. If this is not acceptable, wait until an appropriate time to assign actions to the event or Discrete Input.
6.7 Configure digital communications
The digital communications parameters control how the transmitter will communicate using digital communications.
Your transmitter supports the following types of digital communications:
• HART ® /Bell 202 over the primary mA terminals
• Modbus ® RTU via the service port
Note
The service port responds automatically to a wide range of connection requests. It is not configurable.
Configuration and Use Manual 103
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
6.7.1 Configure HART
®
/Bell 202 communications
HART ® /Bell 202 communications parameters support HART ® mA terminals over a HART ® /Bell 202 network.
communications with the transmitter's primary
Configure basic HART parameters
Basic HART parameters include the HART address, HART tags, and the operation of the primary mA Output.
HART/Bell 202 communications parameters support HART communication with the transmitter's primary mA terminals over a HART/Bell 202 network. The HART/Bell 202 communications parameters include:
• HART Address (Polling Address)
• mA Output Action
• Burst Parameters (optional)
• HART Variables (optional)
Procedure
1. Set HART Address to a value that is unique on your network.
• Default: 0
• Range: 0 to 15
Tip
• The default address is typically used unless you are in a multidrop environment.
• Devices using HART protocol to communicate with the transmitter may use either HART Address or
HART Tag (Software Tag) to identify the transmitter. Configure either or both, as required by your other HART devices.
2. Ensure that mA Output Action is configured appropriately.
Option
Enabled (Live)
Disabled (Fixed)
Description
The primary mA Output reports process data as configured.
The primary mA Output is fixed at 4 mA and does not report process data.
Important
If you use ProLink III to set HART Address to 0 , the program automatically enables mA Output Action .
If you use ProLink III to set HART Address to any other value, the program automatically disables mA
Output Action . This is designed to make it easier to configure the transmitter for legacy behavior.
Always verify mA Output Action after setting HART Address .
Configure burst parameters
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART)
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Communications → Set Up Burst Mode
104 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Burst mode is a mode of communication during which the transmitter regularly broadcasts HART digital information over the primary mA Output. The burst parameters control the information that is broadcast when burst mode is enabled.
Tip
In typical installations, burst mode is disabled. Enable burst mode only if you are using a HART Triloop.
Procedure
1. Enable Burst Mode .
2. Set Burst Mode Output as desired.
ProLink III
Source (Primary Variable)
Label
Field Communicator
PV
Description
Primary Variable (Percent
Range/Current)
Process Variables/Current
Transmitter variables
% range/current
Process variables/current
Fld dev var
The transmitter sends the primary variable (PV) in the configured measurement units in each burst (e.g.,
14.0 g/sec, 13.5 g/sec, 12.0 g/sec.
The transmitter sends the PV’s percent of range and the
PV’s actual mA level in each burst (e.g., 25%, 11.0 mA.
The transmitter sends PV, SV, TV, and QV values in measurement units and the PV’s actual milliamp reading in each burst (e.g., 50 g/sec, 23 °C, 50 g/sec, 0.0023 g/cm3,
11.8 mA.
The transmitter sends four user-specified process variables in each burst.
3. Ensure that the burst output variables are set appropriately.
• If you set Burst Mode Output to send four user-specified variables, set the four process variables to be sent in each burst.
• If you set Burst Mode Output to any other option, ensure that the HART variables are set as desired.
Configure HART variables (PV, SV, TV, QV)
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART)
Configure → Manual Setup → Inputs/Outputs → Variable Mapping
The HART variables are a set of four variables predefined for HART use. The HART variables include the
Primary Variable (PV), Secondary Variable (SV), Tertiary Variable (TV), and Quaternary Variable (QV). You can assign specific process variables to the HART variables, and then use standard HART methods to read or broadcast the assigned process data.
Tip
The Tertiary Variable and Quaternary Variable are also called the Third Variable (TV) and Fourth Variable (FV).
Configuration and Use Manual 105
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Options for HART variables
Table 6-13: Standard HART process variables
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
Board Temperature
Density
Drive Gain
External Pressure
External Temperature
Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Inventory
Gas Standard Volume Total
Line (Gross) Volume Flow Rate
Line (Gross) Volume Inventory
Line (Gross) Volume Total
Live Zero
LPO Amplitude
Mass Flow Rate
Mass Inventory
Mass Total
Meter Temperature (T-Series)
RPO Amplitude
Temperature
Tube Frequency
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
✓
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
✓
✓
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Table 6-14: Petroleum measurement HART process variables
Process variable
API Average Density
API Average Temperature
API Corrected Volume Flow
API Corrected Volume Inventory
API Corrected Volume Total
API CTL
API Density At Reference
Primary
Variable (PV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
106 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Table 6-15: Concentration measurement HART process variables
Process variable
CM Baume (700 core processor only)
CM Concentration
CM Density at Reference
CM Net Mass Flow
CM Net Mass Inventory
CM Net Mass Total
CM Net Volume Flow
CM Net Volume Inventory
CM Net Volume Total
CM Specific Gravity
CM Standard Volume Flow
CM Standard Volume Inventory
CM Standard Volume Total
✓
✓
✓
Primary
Variable (PV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
✓
✓
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Table 6-16: Fuel consumption HART process variables
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
✓ Differential mass flow
Differential mass inventory
Differential mass total
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
Table 6-17: PVR-only HART process variables
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
✓ Corrected Oil Flow
Corrected Oil Total
Corrected Water Cut
Corrected Water Flow
Corrected Water Total
Density of Oil @ Line Fixd degAPI
Density of Oil @ Line Fixd SGU
Oil Total @ Line
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Oil Flow @ 60 °F
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Oil Flow @ Line
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
Configuration and Use Manual 107
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 6-17: PVR-only HART process variables (continued)
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Oil Total @ 60 °F
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Oil Total @ Line
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Total of Mix @ 60 °F
Shrinkage Factor Corrected Volume Of Mix @ 60 °F ✓
Uncorrected Oil Flow ✓
Uncorrected Water Cut
Uncorrected Water Flow
Volume Flow of Mix at Line
✓
✓
✓
Volume Total Of Mix @ Line
Water Total @ Line
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
Third Variable
(TV)
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Table 6-18: TMR-only HART process variables
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
✓ Remediated Mass Flow
Remediated Mass Total
Remediated Mass Inventory
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
✓
✓
Table 6-19: PVR- and TBR-only HART process variables
Process variable
Unremediated Density
Primary
Variable (PV)
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
Table 6-20: PVR, TBR, and TMR HART process variables
Process variable Primary
Variable (PV)
Total Remediated Time
Secondary
Variable (SV)
Third Variable
(TV)
Fourth
Variable (QV )
✓
Interaction of HART variables and transmitter outputs
The HART variables are automatically reported through specific transmitter outputs. They may also be reported through HART burst mode, if enabled on your transmitter.
Table 6-21: HART variables and transmitter outputs
HART variable
Primary Variable (PV)
Reported via
Primary mA output
Comments
If one assignment is changed, the other is changed automatically, and vice versa.
108 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Table 6-21: HART variables and transmitter outputs (continued)
HART variable
Secondary Variable (SV)
Tertiary Variable (TV)
Quaternary Variable (QV)
Reported via
Secondary mA Output (if present on your transmitter)
Frequency Output (if present on your transmitter)
Not associated with an output
Comments
If one assignment is changed, the other is changed automatically, and vice versa. If your transmitter is not configured for a secondary mA Output, the SV must be configured directly, and the value of the SV is available only via digital communications.
If one assignment is changed, the other is changed automatically, and vice versa. If your transmitter does not have a Frequency Output, the TV must be configured directly, and the value of the TV is available only via digital communications.
The QV must be configured directly, and the value of the
QV is available only via digital communications.
6.7.2 Configure Digital Communications Fault Action
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
Configure → Alert Setup → I/O Fault Actions → Comm Fault Action
Digital Communications Fault Action specifies the values that will be reported via digital communications if the device encounters an internal fault condition.
Procedure
Set Digital Communications Fault Action as desired.
The default setting is None.
Restriction
• If mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action is set to None, Digital Communications
Fault Action should also be set to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data, and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
• If you set Digital Communications Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or
Frequency Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Options for Digital Communications Fault Action
Description
ProLink III
Upscale
Label
Field Communicator
Upscale • Process variable values indicate that the value is greater than the upper sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
Configuration and Use Manual 109
Integrate the meter with the control system
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
ProLink III
Downscale
Zero
Not a Number
Flow to Zero
None
Label
Field Communicator
Downscale
IntZero-All 0
Not-a-Number
IntZero-Flow 0
None (default)
Description
• Process variable values indicate that the value is lower than the lower sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Flow rate variables go to the value that represents a flow rate of 0 (zero).
• Density is reported as 0 .
• Temperature is reported as 0 °C , or the equivalent if other units are used (e.g., 32 °F .
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Process variables are reported as IEEE NAN .
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Modbus ® scaled integers are reported as Max Int .
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Flow rates are reported as 0 .
• Other process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• All process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers increment if they are running.
NOTICE
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data, and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Restriction
If Digital Communications Fault Action is set to NAN (not a number), you cannot set mA Output Fault
Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
110 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Complete the configuration
October 2022
7 Complete the configuration
7.1 Test or tune the system using sensor simulation
Use sensor simulation to test the system's response to a variety of process conditions, including boundary conditions, problem conditions, or alert conditions, or to tune the loop.
Prerequisites
Before enabling sensor simulation, ensure that your process can tolerate the effects of the simulated process values.
Restriction
Sensor simulation is available only on flow meters with the enhanced core processor.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the sensor simulation menu.
Communications tool
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Menu path
Not available
Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Sensor Simulation
Service Tools → Simulate → Simulate Sensor
2. Enable sensor simulation.
3. For mass flow, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
4. For density, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Configuration and Use Manual 111
Complete the configuration
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option
Sine
Required values
Period
Minimum
Maximum
5. For temperature, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
6. Observe the system response to the simulated values and make any appropriate changes to the transmitter configuration or to the system.
7. Modify the simulated values and repeat.
8. When you have finished testing or tuning, disable sensor simulation.
7.1.1 Sensor simulation
Sensor simulation allows you to test the system or tune the loop without having to create the test conditions in your process. When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports the simulated values for mass flow, density, and temperature, and takes all appropriate actions. For example, the transmitter might apply a cutoff, activate an event, or post an alert.
When sensor simulation is enabled, the simulated values are stored in the same memory locations used for process data from the sensor. The simulated values are then used throughout transmitter functioning. For example, sensor simulation will affect:
• All mass flow rate, temperature, and density values displayed or reported via outputs or digital communications
• The mass total and mass inventory values
• All volume calculations and data, including reported values, volume totals, and volume inventories
• All mass, temperature, density, or volume values logged to Data Logger
Sensor simulation does not affect any diagnostic values.
Unlike actual mass flow rate and density values, the simulated values are not temperature-compensated
(adjusted for the effect of temperature on the sensor’s flow tubes).
112 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Complete the configuration
October 2022
7.2 Back up transmitter configuration
ProLink III provides a configuration upload/download function which allows you to save configuration sets to your PC. This allows you to back up and restore your transmitter configuration. This is also a convenient way to replicate a configuration across multiple devices.
Restriction
This function is not available with any other communications tools.
Procedure
To back up the transmitter configuration using ProLink III: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Save or Load Configuration Data .
b) In the Configuration group box, select the configuration data you want to save.
c) Click Save , then specify a file name and location on your computer.
d) Click Start Save .
The backup file is saved to the specified name and location. It is saved as a text file and can be read using any text editor.
7.3 Enable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → CONFIG → LOCK
Device Tools → Configuration → Write-Protection
Configure → Manual Setup → Info Parameters → Transmitter Info → Write Protect
If the transmitter is write-protected, the configuration is locked and nobody can change it until it is unlocked.
This prevents accidental or unauthorized changes to the transmitter configuration parameters.
Configuration and Use Manual 113
Complete the configuration
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
114 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Set up the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
8 Set up the Weights & Measures application
Information in this chapter is applicable only if your transmitter was ordered with the Weights & Measures application.
8.1 Weights & Measures application
The Weights & Measures application is used to provide process data that is legal for custody transfer applications when an approved method is used to read or obtain the measurement.
Regulatory agencies
When installed, configured, and used as recommended by Micro Motion, the Weights & Measures application is certified by the following regulatory agencies:
• NTEP (National Type Evaluation Program). NTEP requirements apply in the U.S.A. and Canada.
• OIML (Organization of Legal Metrology). OIML requirements apply in all other world areas.
Depending on the regulatory agency that governs your installation, different setup, configuration, and operation methods are applicable.
Secured vs. unsecured
When the Weights & Measures application is installed, the transmitter is always “secured” or “unsecured.”
The transmitter leaves the factory in unsecured mode, with Status Alarm A027: Security Breach active.
Additionally, flow measurement may be disabled. Measurement data from an unsecured transmitter cannot be used for custody transfer applications.
To clear the alarm and enable flow measurement, you must configure the Weights & Measures application and secure the transmitter. When the transmitter is secured, the alarm is cleared and flow measurement is enabled automatically.
Security types and requirements
Before using the transmitter for Weights & Measures measurement, both metrological security and physical security must be implemented.
Metrological security
Physical security
Metrological security protects the transmitter from all changes that would affect measurement. This includes changes to configuration and some maintenance procedures.
Micro Motion implements metrological security via “software security.” Software security is a setting inside the transmitter that programmatically disables the prohibited actions.
Software security can be enabled or disabled from ProLink III. Practically speaking, software security provides complete protection against unauthorized changes or actions.
Physical security is implemented by a seal installed by a certified Weights & Measures inspector. The seal prevents access to the service port terminals.
Although the seal can be broken easily, it cannot be replaced by anybody other than a
Weights & Measures inspector. This makes it easy to detect that security has been violated. If the seal is not intact, transmitter measurements are not valid for custody transfer.
Configuration methods
You must use ProLink III and a service port connection to configure the Weights & Measures parameters.
Configuration and Use Manual 115
Set up the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
8.2 Set up the Weights & Measures application using
ProLink III
When your transmitter is set up to comply with OIML or NTEP requirements, and the transmitter is secured, selected measurement data from the transmitter is approved for Weights & Measures applications.
Prerequisites
Important
Review the Weights & Measures requirements for your location and ensure that you are complying with all local requirements as well as the OIML or NTEP requirements.
If necessary for your installation, arrange for a site visit by a certified Weights & Measures inspector, and ensure that the inspector is present for the appropriate portions of this procedure.
Ensure that the transmitter is ready to be secured, i.e., it is configured as desired and you have performed all appropriate tests and adjustments. After the transmitter is secured, you cannot make any changes to configuration, many maintenance actions are disallowed, and some operator actions are disallowed.
Procedure
1. Make a service port connection from ProLink III to your transmitter.
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Weights & Measures and set Regulatory Agency to the apropriate regulatory agency for your application.
Option
NTEP
OIML
Description
Regulatory agency for the U.S.A. and Canada
Regulatory agency for all other world areas
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Control Methods and set totalizer control methods as desired.
Parameter
Reset Totalizers from Display
Reset Totalizers via Remote
Communications
Option
• Enabled: You can reset totalizers from the display, whether or not the transmitter is secured.
• Disabled: You can reset totalizers from the display only when the transmitter is unsecured.
• Enabled: You can reset totalizers using digital communications, whether or not the transmitter is secured.
• Disabled: You can reset totalizers using digital communications only when the transmitter is unsecured.
Digital communications refers to any method that uses Modbus or HART communications to interact with the transmitter. This includes ProLink III, the Field Communicator, and any host.
4. If required for your installation, choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display →
Display Security , then enable and configure a password for the alarm menu.
Security for the alarm menu is required under German law for PTB-type approval for gas applications.
116 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Set up the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
5. If required for your installation, choose Device Tools → Device Information , then read and record the firmware checksum values for the transmitter and the core processor.
The checksum values for the transmitter firmware and the core processor firmware must be read during meter commissioning to meet Weights & Measures requirements for gas applications in
Germany. They may also be useful for MID/Welmec 7.2 test reports.
6. If required for your installation, monitor the zero value of your system: a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables and configure Field Verification Zero ( FVZ ) as a display variable.
b) At the transmitter display, read and record the current value of FVZ .
FVZ is a diagnostic variable that monitors the zero value over a period of 3 minutes. It must be read during meter commissioning to comply with MID requirements for Weights & Measures applications in
Measuring Instrument Directive (MID) 2004/22/EC. Refer to your Standard Operating Procedures documentation for detailed instructions.
7. Enable software security: Device Tools → Configuration → Weights & Measures → Software
Security .
Important
Depending on local requirements, this step may need to be witnessed by a certified Weights &
Measures inspector.
After this step, the transmitter is in a condition of metrological security (measurement security). The transmitter performs the following actions:
• Securing all measurement parameters. You can read the current configurations but you cannot change them.
• Clearing Status Alert A027: Security Breach.
8. Install the physical seal.
Important
In most installations, the physical seal is a wire seal that must be installed by a certified Weights &
Measures inspector. The seal is provided by the inspector. The physical seal is inserted through the locking clamps on the transmitter (if available on your transmitter).
Configuration and Use Manual 117
Set up the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Figure 8-1: Example of locking clamp and seal on transmitter
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
118 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022
9 Transmitter operation
9.1 Record the process variables
Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of specific process variable measurements, including the acceptable range of measurements, under normal operating conditions. This data will help you recognize when the process or diagnostic variables are unusually high or low, and may help you diagnose and troubleshoot application issues.
Procedure
Record the following process and diagnostic variables, under normal operating conditions.
Typical average
Measurement
Typical high Typical low Variable
Flow rate
Density
Temperature
Tube frequency
Pickoff voltage
Drive gain
9.2 View process variables
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Scroll to the desired process variable. If AutoScroll is enabled, you can wait until the process variable is displayed. See
View process variables using the display for more information.
View the desired variable on the main screen under Process Variables . See
View process variables and other data using ProLink III
for more information.
Overview → Shortcuts → Variables → Process Variables
Process variables provide information about the state of the process fluid, such as flow rate, density, and temperature, as well as running totals. Process variables can also provide data about flowmeter operation, such as drive gain and pickoff voltage. This information can be used to understand and troubleshoot your process.
9.2.1 View process variables using the display
Procedure
View the desired process variables.
The display shows the configured display variables. For each display variable, the display reports the abbreviated name of the process variable (for example, DENS for density), the current value of that process variable, and the associated unit of measure (for example, G/CM 3 ).
Configuration and Use Manual 119
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
If Auto Scroll is enabled, the display cycles through the display variables, showing each display variable for a user-specified number of seconds. Whether or not Auto Scroll is enabled, you can activate Select to move to the next display variable.
Figure 9-1: Transmitter display features
A
H
B
G
C
D
F
E
A. Status LED
B. Display (LCD panel)
C. Process variable
D.
Scroll optical switch
E. Optical switch indicator: turns red when either Scroll or Select is activated
F.
Select optical switch
G. Unit of measure for process variable
H. Current value of process variable
9.2.2 View process variables and other data using ProLink III
Monitor process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data to maintain process quality.
ProLink III automatically displays process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data on the main screen.
Tip
ProLink III allows you to choose the process variables that appear on the main screen. You can also choose whether to view data in Analog Gauge view or digital view, and you can customize the gauge settings. For more information, see the Prolink III user manual .
120 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022
9.2.3 View process variables using the Field Communicator
Monitor process variables to maintain process quality.
Procedure
• To view current values of basic process variables, choose Overview .
• To view a more complete set of process variables, plus the current state of the outputs, choose Service
Tools → Variables .
9.3 View transmitter status using the status LED
The status LED shows the current alert condition of the transmitter. The status LED is located on the face of the transmitter.
Procedure
Observe the status LED.
• If your transmitter has a display, you can view the status LED with the transmitter housing cover in place.
• If your transmitter does not have a display, it does not have a status LED. This option is not available.
To interpret the status LED, see the following table.
Restriction
If LED Blinking is disabled, the status LED will flash only during calibration. It will not flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.
LED state
Solid green
Flashing green (if enabled)
Solid yellow
Flashing yellow (if enabled)
Solid red
Description
No alerts are active.
Unacknowledged corrected condition (no alert)
One or more low-severity alerts are active.
A low severity alarm can mean one or more process variables is at a set output level (i.e.
simulation or two phase timeout).
Calibration in progress, or Known Density
Verification in progress.
One or more low-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
One or more high-severity alerts are active.
Recommendation
Continue with configuration or process measurement.
Continue with configuration or process measurement. Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
Configuration and Use Manual 121
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
LED state
Flashing red (if enabled)
Description
One or more high-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
Recommendation
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
9.4 View and acknowledge status alerts
The transmitter posts status alerts whenever a process variable exceeds its defined limits or the transmitter detects a fault condition. You can view active alerts, and you can acknowledge alerts. Acknowledging alerts is not required.
9.4.1 View and acknowledge alerts using the display
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged. From this list, you can acknowledge individual alerts.
Prerequisites
Operator access to the alert menu must be enabled (default setting). If operator access to the alert menu is disabled, you must use another method to view or acknowledge status alerts.
Note
Only Fault and Informational alerts are listed. The transmitter automatically filters out alerts with Status Alert
Severity set to Ignore.
Procedure
.
122 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Figure 9-2: Using the display to view and acknowledge the status alerts (alarms)
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
SEE ALERT
Select
Select
Is ACK ALL enabled?
No
Select
Yes
ACK ALL
Yes No
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
Yes
Active/ unacknowledged alarms?
No
Alert code
Scroll Select
Select
Yes
ACK
No
Scroll
NO ALERT
Scroll
EXIT
Configuration and Use Manual 123
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Postrequisites
• To clear the following alerts, you must correct the problem, acknowledge the alert, then power-cycle the transmitter: A001, A002, A010, A011, A012, A013, A018, A019, A022, A023, A024, A025, A028, A029,
A031.
• For all other alerts:
— If the alert is inactive when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list.
— If the alert is active when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list when the alert condition clears.
Related information
Alert data in transmitter memory
9.4.2 View and acknowledge alerts using ProLink III
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged. From this list, you can acknowledge individual alerts or choose to acknowledge all alerts at once.
Procedure
1. View alerts on the ProLink III Device Tools → Alerts tab.
All active or unacknowledged alerts are listed, and displayed according to the following categories:
Category
Failed: Fix Now
Description
A meter failure has occurred and must be addressed immediately.
Maintenance: Fix Soon A condition has occurred that can be fixed at a later time.
Advisory: Informational A condition has occurred, but requires no maintenance from you.
Notes
• All fault alerts are displayed in the Failed: Fix Now category.
• All information alerts are displayed in either the Maintenance: Fix Soon category or the Advisory:
Informational category. The category assignment is hard-coded.
• The transmitter automatically filters out alerts with Alert Severity set to Ignore.
2. To acknowledge a single alert, check the Ack checkbox for that alert. To acknowledge all alerts at once, click Ack All .
Postrequisites
• To clear the following alerts, you must correct the problem, acknowledge the alert, then power-cycle the transmitter: A001, A002, A010, A011, A012, A013, A018, A019, A022, A023, A024, A025, A028, A029,
A031.
• For all other alerts:
— If the alert is inactive when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list.
— If the alert is active when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list when the alert condition clears.
124 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Related information
Alert data in transmitter memory
9.4.3 View alerts using the Field Communicator
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged.
Procedure
• To view active or unacknowledged alerts, choose Overview → Device Status or Service Tools → Alerts .
All active alerts and unacknowledged alerts are listed.
Note
Only Fault and Information alerts are listed. The transmitter automatically filters out alerts with Status
Alert Severity set to ignore.
• To refresh the list, choose Service Tools → Alerts → Refresh Alerts .
Related information
Alert data in transmitter memory
9.4.4 Alert data in transmitter memory
The transmitter maintains three sets of data for every alert that is posted.
For each alert occurrence, the following three sets of data are maintained in transmitter memory:
• Alert List
• Alert Statistics
• Recent Alerts
Alert data structure
Alert List
Transmitter action if condition occurs
Contents
As determined by the alert status bits, a list of:
• All currently active alerts
• All previously active alerts that have not been acknowledged
Clearing
Cleared and regenerated with every transmitter power cycle
Alert Statistics
Recent Alerts
One record for each alert (by alert number) that has occurred since the last master reset.
Each record contains:
• A count of the number of occurrences
• Timestamps for the most recent posting and clearing
Not cleared; maintained across transmitter power cycles
50 most recent alert postings or alert clearings Not cleared; maintained across transmitter power cycles
Configuration and Use Manual 125
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
9.5 Read totalizer and inventory values
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
To read a totalizer or inventory value from the display, it must be configured as a display variable.
View the desired variable on the main screen under Process Variables .
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control
Totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last totalizer reset. Inventories keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last inventory reset.
Tip
You can use the inventories to keep a running total of mass or volume across multiple totalizer resets.
9.6 Start and stop totalizers and inventories
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
See Start and stop totalizers and inventories using the display .
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Start All Totals
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Stop All Totals
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → All Totalizers → Start Totalizers
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → All Totalizers → Stop Totalizers
When you start a totalizer, it tracks process measurement. In a typical application, its value increases with flow. When you stop a totalizer, it stops tracking process measurement and its value does not change with flow. Inventories are started and stopped automatically, when totalizers are started and stopped.
Important
Totalizers and inventories are started or stopped as a group. When you start any totalizer, all other totalizers and all inventories are started simultaneously. When you stop any totalizer, all other totalizers and all inventories are stopped simultaneously. You cannot start or stop inventories directly.
9.6.1 Start and stop totalizers and inventories using the display
Prerequisites
• The Totalizer Start/Stop display function must be enabled.
• At least one totalizer must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
• To start all totalizers and inventories using the display:
Note
If the PLC is connected and communicating, the start/stop and reset totalizers commands might be overriding any totalizer commands from the local display or from ProLink III.
a) Scroll until the word TOTAL appears in the lower left corner of the display.
Important
Because all totalizers are started or stopped together, it does not matter which total you use.
126 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022 b) Select .
c) Scroll until START appears beneath the current totalizer value.
Exit displays beneath the current totalizer value.
d) Select .
e) Select again to confirm.
f) Scroll to EXIT.
• To stop all totalizers and inventories using the display: a) Scroll until the word TOTAL appears in the lower left corner of the display.
Important
Because all totalizers are started or stopped together, it does not matter which total you use.
b) Select .
c) Scroll until STOP appears beneath the current totalizer value.
d) Select .
e) Select again to confirm.
f) Scroll to EXIT.
9.7 Reset totalizers
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
See Reset totalizers using the display
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Mass Total
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Volume Total
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Gas Total
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset All Totals
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → Mass → Mass Total
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → Gas Standard Volume → Volume Total
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → Gas Standard Volume → GSV Total
Service Tools → Variables → Totalizer Control → All Totalizers → Reset All Totals
When you reset a totalizer, the transmitter sets its value to 0. It does not matter whether the totalizer is started or stopped. If the totalizer is started, it continues to track process measurement.
Tip
When you reset a single totalizer, the values of other totalizers are not reset. Inventory values are not reset.
9.7.1 Reset totalizers using the display
Prerequisites
• The Totalizer Reset display function must be enabled.
• The totalizer that you want to reset must be configured as a display variable. For example:
Configuration and Use Manual 127
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
— If you want to reset the mass totalizer, Mass Total must be configured as a display variable.
— If you want to reset the volume totalizer, Volume Total must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
• To reset the mass totalizer: a) Scroll until the mass totalizer value appears.
b) Select .
Exit displays beneath the current totalizer value.
c) Scroll until Reset displays beneath the current totalizer value.
d) Select .
Reset and Yes?
alternately flash beneath the current totalizer value.
e) Select again to confirm.
f) Scroll to EXIT.
g) Select .
• To reset the volume totalizer: a) Scroll until the volume totalizer value appears.
b) Select .
Exit displays beneath the current totalizer value.
c) Scroll until Reset displays beneath the current totalizer value.
d) Select .
Reset and Yes?
alternately flash beneath the current totalizer value.
e) Select again to confirm.
f) Scroll to EXIT.
g) Select .
• To reset the gas standard volume totalizer: a) Scroll until the gas standard volume totalizer value appears.
b) Select .
Exit displays beneath the current totalizer value.
c) Scroll until Reset displays beneath the current totalizer value.
d) Select .
Reset and Yes?
alternately flash beneath the current totalizer value.
e) Select again to confirm.
f) Scroll to EXIT.
g) Select .
128 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter operation
October 2022
9.8 Reset inventories
ProLink III Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Mass Inventory
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Volume Inventory
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset Gas Inventory
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizer and Inventories → Reset All Inventories
When you reset an inventory, the transmitter sets its value to 0. It does not matter whether the inventory is started or stopped. If the inventory is started, it continues to track process measurement.
Tip
Mass and volume inventory totals cannot be set separately. They can only be reset together simultaneously.
Prerequisites
To use ProLink III to reset the inventories, the feature must be enabled.
To enable inventory reset in ProLink III:
1. Choose Tools > Options .
2. Select Reset Inventories from ProLink III .
3. Select OK .
Once enabled, this feature remains enabled until it is disabled.
Configuration and Use Manual 129
Transmitter operation
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
130 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
10 Operate the transmitter with the Weights
& Measures application
Information in this chapter is applicable only if your transmitter was ordered with the Weights & Measures application.
10.1 Operate the transmitter when the Weights &
Measures application is installed
When the Weights & Measures application is installed, many of the basic functions of the transmitter are modified.
Procedure
• To make a connection:
• If the physical seal is not installed, you can use any supported connection type.
• If the physical seal is installed, you cannot make a service port connection. You can use any other supported connection type.
• To read or obtain process data:
• For an approved measurement, you must use an approved method.
• If the measurement does not have to be approved, you can use any available method.
Important
The behavior of transmitter outputs and process variable values is modified by the Weights & Measures application. Ensure that you know the effects of this application on outputs and process variable values.
• To reset totalizers:
• If the transmitter is unsecured, you can reset totalizers. If you reset one totalizer, all other totalizers are reset automatically.
• If the transmitter is secured, you may or may not be able to reset totalizers, depending on configuration. If totalizer reset is enabled, you cannot reset totalizers unless the flow rate is 0. To reset totalizers from the display, you may need to enter the alarm menu password, whether or not you have enabled it. The default value for Alarm Menu Password is 1234.
• You cannot stop totalizers while the tranmitter is secured.
• You cannot reset inventories while the transmitter is secured.
10.1.1 Approved methods to read or obtain process data
When the Weights & Measures application is installed, process data is approved for custody transfer use only if an approved method is used for reading or obtaining it.
Note
On the primary mA output, HART/Bell 202 communications may be used to poll for either temperature or pressure, in conjunction with process data reporting.
Configuration and Use Manual 131
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 10-1: NTEP-approved methods to read or obtain process data
Process data
Mass
Volume
Density
Totalizer values
Inventory values
Fault indication mA output(s)
✓
Frequency output(s)
✓
✓
✓
Transmitter display
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Table 10-2: OIML-approved methods to read or obtain process data
Process data
Mass
Volume
Density
Totalizer values
Inventory values
Fault indication mA output(s)
✓
(1) Special handling is applied to large totalizer values.
Frequency output(s)
✓
✓
✓
Transmitter display
✓
✓
✓
✓
10.1.2 Large totalizer values on the display (OIML applications only)
If Approval is set to OIML and totalizer values become large enough, the display handles large values in a special way. The value displayed may not reflect the actual value.
The display is able to show a maximum of eight characters, including the decimal point. For all totalizer values configured as display variables, the position of the decimal point on the display is fixed to the configured precision of the display variable.
When the totalizer reaches the largest value that can be displayed in these circumstances:
• The digits roll over.
• The decimal point does not move.
• The number of digits on the display does not change.
• The internal totalizer is reset to 0.
For example, the value 99999.999 rolls over to 00000.000.
Tip
If you are not sure whether or not the totalizer value on the display has rolled over, check the value by using another method to read the current data.
Notes
• The mass and volume totalizers do not necessarily roll over at the same time.
132 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
• This feature does not apply to inventories. The display presents large inventory values in the standard manner.
10.1.3 Effect of the Weights & Measures application on process measurement and outputs
When the Weights & Measures application is installed, process measurement and reporting is modified to prevent unauthorized use of the data. Specific changes are controlled by whether the transmitter is secured or unsecured.
Table 10-3: Transmitter outputs and process data when Approvals=NTEP
Function
Outputs
Process variables
Totalizers
Inventories
Transmitter status mA output behavior
Unsecured
If reporting a flow variable, mA output reports zero flow. Otherwise, normal.
Frequency output behavior Inactive (produces no pulses), even under fault conditions
Secured
Normal
Normal
Discrete output behavior
All flow rates
Density
Temperature
Values
Values
Normal
Reported as zero
Reported normally
Reported normally
Do not increment or decrement
Do not increment or decrement
Normal
Reported normally
Reported normally
Reported normally
Increment normally
Increment normally
Table 10-4: Transmitter outputs and process data when Approvals=OIML
Function
Outputs
Process variables
Totalizers mA output behavior
Transmitter status
Unsecured
Performs configured fault action
Secured
Normal
Normal Frequency output behavior Performs configured fault action
Discrete output behavior Performs configured fault action
All flow rates
Density
Temperature
Values
Reported normally
Reported normally
Reported normally
Do not increment or decrement
Normal
Reported normally
Reported normally
Reported normally
Increment normally
Configuration and Use Manual 133
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 10-4: Transmitter outputs and process data when Approvals=OIML (continued)
Function
Inventories Values
Unsecured
Do not increment or decrement
Transmitter status
Secured
Increment normally
10.1.4 Effect of the Weights & Measures application on operation and maintenance functions
When the Weights & Measures application is installed, specific operations and maintenance activities may be disallowed. You can switch to unsecured mode, perform the required actions, then switch back to secured mode.
Table 10-5: Available actions when Approvals=NTEP
Function
Connecting from ProLink III, the Field Communicator, or a host
Configuration
Calibration
Smart Meter Verification
External pressure and temperature data
Testing and trimming outputs
Reading
Changing
Zero
Density
Temperature
Outputs set to Continue
Measuring
Outputs set to Fault
Allowed
Allowed
Outputs set to Last
Measured Value
Retrieved by polling
Allowed
Allowed
Written by Modbus or HART host mA output loop test mA output trim
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Frequency output loop test Not allowed
Discrete output loop test Allowed
Transmitter status
Unsecured
All supported connection types are available.
Secured
Physical security prevents access to the service port terminals. HART/Bell 202 connections can be used to read data from the transmitter, but software security prevents writing to the transmitter.
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
134 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Table 10-5: Available actions when Approvals=NTEP (continued)
Function
Totalizers
Inventories
Sensor simulation
Resetting
Starting
Stopping
Resetting
Transmitter status
Unsecured
Allowed. If any single totalizer is reset, all other totalizers are reset automatically.
Secured
May or may not be allowed, depending on configuration.
Can be performed only if flow rate is zero. If any single totalizer is reset, all other totalizers are reset automatically.
Not allowed
N/A
Not allowed
Allowed
N/A
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Table 10-6: Available actions when Approvals=OIML
Function
Connecting from ProLink III, the Field Communicator, or a host
Configuration
Calibration
Smart Meter Verification
External pressure and temperature data
Outputs
Reading
Changing
Zero
Density
Temperature
Outputs set to Continue
Measuring
Outputs set to Fault
Outputs set to Last
Measured Value
Retrieved by polling
Written by Modbus or HART host
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed mA output loop test mA output trim
Allowed
Allowed
Frequency output loop test Allowed
Transmitter status
Unsecured
All supported connection types are available.
Secured
Physical security prevents access to the service port terminals. HART/Bell 202 connections can be used to read data from the transmitter, but software security prevents writing to the transmitter.
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Configuration and Use Manual 135
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 10-6: Available actions when Approvals=OIML (continued)
Function
Process variables
Totalizers
Inventories
Sensor simulation
Discrete output loop test
All flow rates
Density
Temperature
Resetting
Starting
Stopping
Resetting
Unsecured
Allowed
Reported normally
Reported normally
Transmitter status
Secured
Not allowed
Reported normally
Reported normally
Reported normally Reported normally
Allowed. If any single totalizer is reset, all other totalizers are reset automatically.
May or may not be allowed, depending on configuration.
Can be performed only if flow rate is zero. If any single totalizer is reset, all other totalizers are reset automatically.
Not allowed
N/A
Allowed
Allowed
N/A
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
10.2 Switch between secured and unsecured mode
You must switch to unsecured mode to change the transmitter configuration or perform many administrative tasks. You must switch back to secured mode in order to meet Weights & Measures requirements for process measurement.
You must use one of the following tools to switch modes:
• ProLink III
• The Custody Transfer switching utility. The switching utility is free, and is available from the Software
Downloads page at Emerson.com
.
The controls are not accessible in any other way.
10.2.1 Switch between secured and unsecured mode using ProLink
III
Prerequisites
Before switching to unsecured mode, ensure that you will be able to switch back to secured mode. Because switching to unsecured mode requires breaking the physical seal, switching back to secured mode may require a site visit from a certified Weights & Measures inspector and reinstallation of the physical seal.
Ensure that the wiring is in place for a service port connection. You may need to break the seal and remove the clamp.
Procedure
• To switch from secured mode to unsecured mode:
136 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022 a) Make a service port connection to your transmitter.
b) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Weights & Measures .
c) Set Software Security to Disabled.
• To switch from unsecured mode to secured mode: a) Make a service port connection to your transmitter.
b) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Weights & Measures .
c) Set Software Security to Enabled.
10.2.2 Switch between secured and unsecured mode using the switching utility
Prerequisites
The switching utility must be installed on your PC. The switching utility is available from the Software
Downloads page at Emerson.com
.
Before switching to unsecured mode, ensure that you will be able to switch back to secured mode. Because switching to unsecured mode requires breaking the physical seal, switching back to secured mode may require a site visit from a certified Weights & Measures inspector and reinstallation of the physical seal.
Ensure that the wiring is in place for a service port connection. You may need to break the seal and remove the clamp.
Procedure
• To switch from secured mode to unsecured mode: a) Run the switching utility.
b) Select the COM port to use for the connection.
c) Click Disable Custody Transfer .
• To switch from unsecured mode to secured mode: a) Run the switching utility.
b) Select the COM port to use for the connection.
c) Click Enable Custody Transfer .
10.3 Clear Status Alarm A027: Security Breach
Status Alarm A027: Security Breach is posted if the transmitter is switched to unsecured mode or if the transmitter detects that the core processor ID has changed.
Procedure
1. If the transmitter is in secured mode, switch to unsecured mode.
2. Take any required actions related to the cause of the security breach.
3. Switch to secured mode.
Configuration and Use Manual 137
Operate the transmitter with the Weights & Measures application
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
10.4 Replacing the core processor in a Weights &
Measures installation
In a Weights & Measures installation, replacing the core processor requires re-sealing the transmitter.
When the transmitter is first secured, the core processor’s unique ID is registered with the transmitter. If you replace the core processor with another core processor, the transmitter will post Status Alarm A026: Sensor/
Xmtr Communication Error. To clear this alarm, you must switch the transmitter to unsecured mode and resecure it. This requires breaking the physical seal and reinstalling it when the entire process is complete.
Other procedures may be required. Refer to the Weights & Measurements documentation for your installation.
Important
In most cases, the physical seal must be installed by a certified Weights & Measures inspector.
138 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
11 Measurement support
11.1 Options for measurement support
Micro Motion provides several measurement support procedures to help you evaluate and maintain your flowmeter's accuracy.
The following methods are available:
• Smart Meter Verification (SMV) evaluates the structural integrity of the sensor tubes by comparing current tube stiffness to the stiffness measured at the factory. Stiffness is defined as the load per unit deflection, or force divided by displacement. Because a change in structural integrity changes the sensor’s response to mass and density, this value can be used as an indicator of measurement performance.
• Meter validation compares flowmeter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external measurement standard. Meter validation requires one data point.
• Calibration establishes the relationship between a process variable and the signal produced at the sensor.
You can calibrate the flowmeter for zero, density, and temperature. Density and temperature calibration require two data points (low and high) and an external measurement for each.
Tip
• Perform SMV at regular intervals to get the best data on your meter's performance.
• To prove the meter against a regulatory standard, or to correct measurement error, use meter validation and meter factors.
• Before performing a field calibration, contact customer support to see if there is an alternative. In many cases, field calibrations have a negative effect on measurement accuracy.
11.2 Use Smart Meter Verification
Smart Meter Verification ™ provides in-process flow meter health verification by analyzing the meter components related to measurement performance. You can run Smart Meter Verification without stopping the process. Use this section to run a Smart Meter Verification test, view and interpret the results, set up automatic execution, and check if a field reference point has been established.
11.2.1 SMV requirements
To use SMV, the transmitter must be paired with an 800 enhanced core processor.
for the minimum version of the transmitter, an 800 enhanced core processor, and communication tool needed to support SMV. (If you are going to perform SMV using the display, only the transmitter and enhanced core processor versions apply.)
Table 11-1: Minimum SMV version
Item
Transmitter
Enhanced core processor
ProLink III
Minimum version (legacy)
6.0
3.6
1.0
Minimum basic SMV transmitter
8.0
4.4
4.0
Configuration and Use Manual 139
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 11-1: Minimum SMV version (continued)
Item
Field Communicator
Minimum version (legacy)
HART device description: device rev 6,
DD rev 2
Minimum basic SMV transmitter
HART device description: device rev 8,
DD rev 1
11.2.2 SMV test preparation
Prerequisites
The following information pertains to the transmitter when connected to an 800 enhanced core processor greater than or equal to v4.7 .
• To avoid or reduce corrosion, erosion, and other process effects, make sure the sensor tube material is compatible with the process fluid in use. For more information, see the Micro Motion Corrosion Guide .
• Important
Micro Motion highly recommends:
— Running the first Smart Meter Verification test when the flow meter is installed in the pipeline according to the installation instructions, and the process is running at its normal operating conditions
— Running all tests thereafter at similar operating conditions
• The Smart Meter Verification test runs best when process conditions are stable. If process conditions are too unstable, the test will abort. To maximize process stability:
— Maintain a constant fluid temperature and pressure.
— Maintain a constant flow rate. If possible, stop flow through the sensor. The sensor should be full of process fluid.
— Avoid changes to fluid composition; for example, two-phase flow or settling.
• For all applications, run Smart Meter Verification while commissioning the meter at normal operating conditions and then run it regularly. Micro Motion also recommends using Smart Meter Verification results along with other diagnostics like drive gain and density to help determine the health of a sensor.
• In certain scenarios, Smart Meter Verification field upgrades for pre-installed meters are possible. Contact factory support to discuss pre-installed meter upgrades.
11.2.3 Smart Meter Verification capabilities
Capability
Calibration coefficients audit
Zero audit
Electronics verification
Automatic test scheduler
History of previous 20 results
Basic
Included
•
•
•
•
•
Professional
Licensed
•
•
•
•
•
140 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
Capability
Basic
Included
Verification report
(1) Create and export with Prolink III, web page, or AMS SNAP-ON.
11.2.4 Run SMV
Run an SMV test using the display
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Figure 11-1: SMV – Top-level menu
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Professional
Licensed
•
Scroll EXIT
Scroll Select
2. Choose Run Verify .
3. Choose Outputs and select the desired output behavior.
Option Description
Continue
Measuring
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Fault During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Last Value During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
While the test is in progress, dots traverse the display and test progress is shown.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
Configuration and Use Manual 141
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
SMV flowchart: Running a test using the display
Figure 11-2: Running an SMV test using the display
RUN VERFY
Select
OUTPUTS
Select
Scroll
CONTINUE MEASR
Select
Scroll
EXIT
FAULT
Select
Scroll LAST VALUE
Select
Scroll
ARE YOU SURE/YES?
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x% Select SENSOR ABORT/YES?
Scroll Select
PASS VERFY
Scroll
RESULTS VIEW/YES?
Scroll Select
To Runcount
(see Results Read)
Pass Test result
Fail
CAUTION VERFY
Scroll
Abort
ABORTED VERFY
Scroll
Abort Type
Scroll
RERUN/YES?
Yes No
Correct condition Scroll
To Enter Meter Verfy
Select
EXIT
Run an SMV test using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Run Test .
142 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
You may need to wait a few seconds while ProLink III synchronizes its database with the transmitter data.
2. Enter any desired information on the Test Definition screen, and click Next .
All information on this screen is optional.
3. Choose the desired output behavior.
Option Description
Continue
Measuring
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable.
The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Held at Last Value During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Held at Fault During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
4. Press Start .
Test progress is displayed on the screen.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions. You can also print the report.
Run an SMV test using the Field Communicator
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
• Overview → Shortcuts → Meter Verification
• Service Tools → Maintenance → Routine Maintenance → Meter Verification
2. Choose Manual Verification .
3. Choose Start .
4. Set output behavior as desired, and press OK if prompted.
Option
Continue Measuring
Outputs Held at Last
Value
Description
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Outputs Held at Fault During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Test progress is displayed on the screen.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
Configuration and Use Manual 143
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
11.2.5 View test data
You can view the results of the current test. You can also view results from previous tests.
Important
You can view previous test results and see detailed test reports only if SMV is licensed.
The transmitter stores the following information about the previous twenty SMV tests:
• Powered-on hours at the time of the test.
• Test result (Pass, Fail, Abort).
• Abort code, if applicable.
In addition, ProLink III provides a detailed test reporting and analysis framework. This information is stored on the PC where ProLink III is installed for tests that were run only on that PC. It includes:
• Timestamp from the PC clock
• Current flowmeter identification data
• Current flow and density configuration parameters
• Current zero values
• Current process values for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, density, temperature, and external pressure
• Customer and test descriptions (if entered by the user)
You can use ProLink III to run a test that displays a test result chart and a test report at the completion of the test. On-screen directions are provided to manipulate the test data or export the data to a CSV file for offline analysis.
View test result data using the display
Procedure
1. If you have just run a test, results are displayed automatically at the end of the test.
2. If SMV is licensed, and you want to view results from previous tests: a) Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
144 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
Figure 11-3: SMV – Top-level menu
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll EXIT
Scroll Select b) Scroll to Results Read and press Select .
The runcount of the most recent test is displayed.
c) To view data for this test, press Select , then press Scroll to scroll through test data.
d) To select a different test, press Scroll , then press Select when the transmitter displays Results
More?
. When the desired test appears, as identified by runcount, press Select .
Configuration and Use Manual 145
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
SMV flowchart: Viewing test results using the display
Figure 11-4: Viewing SMV test results using the display
RESULTS READ
Select
RUNCOUNT x xx HOURS
Select
PASS
Select
Pass
Select
Result type
Fail xx HOURS
Select
FAIL
Select
Abort xx HOURS
Select
Abort Type
Select
Scroll
RESULTS MORE?
To Runcount x-1
Select Scroll
To Run Verfy
Note
If you have a basic (unlicensed version) of SMV, you will not be prompted for results.
View test result data using ProLink III
Prerequisites
You can view test result data only if your SMV is licensed and only for tests that were run on the PC you are currently using.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification and click Previous Test Results .
The chart shows test results for all tests stored in the ProLink III database.
146 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
2. (Optional) Click Next to view and print a test report.
3. (Optional) Click Export Data to CSV File to save the data to a file on your PC.
View test result data using the Field Communicator
Prerequisites
You can view test result data only if your SMV is licensed.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
• Overview → Shortcuts → Meter Verification
• Service Tools → Maintenance → Routine Maintenance → Meter Verification
2. (Optional) If the Field Communicator database is out of date, choose Upload Results Data from
Device .
3. To view data from the most recent test, choose Most Recent Test Results .
4. To view data for all tests in the Field Communicator database: a) Press Show Results Table .
Data from the most recent test is displayed.
b) Press OK to scroll through data from previous tests.
c) To exit the results table, press Abort .
Interpreting Smart Meter Verification results
When the Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test is completed, the result is reported as Pass, Fail, or Abort. (Some tools report the Fail result as Advisory instead.)
Pass The meter is performing within factory specifications.
Abort When you execute a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test performs a selfdiagnostic check to ensure that the flow meter is stable prior to running the test. In the rare case that this check reveals an issue, Smart Meter Verification will report an abort code.
If you manually cancel an in-process Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test result displays Abort Code 1: User-Initiated Abort . In this case, you can restart Smart
Meter Verification without any further action. In the rare case any other abort occurs, contact factory support.
In all cases where a Smart Meter Verification Professional test aborts, no report will be generated.
Fail If a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test ran at normal operating conditions while
conditions were stable and failed, see Resolving a failed Smart Meter Verification test to determine
the appropriate actions.
Configuration and Use Manual 147
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
11.2.6 Resolving a failed Smart Meter Verification test
Use this procedure if a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test ran at normal operating conditions while conditions were stable and failed.
Procedure
1. Verify the sensor by performing a visual inspection, density verification, or field proving.
2. If possible, run Smart Meter Verification Professional with Prolink III Basic or Professional and save the results as follows:
• In a .csv
file
• In a report
3. Contact the factory for further evaluation and instructions.
11.2.7 Schedule automatic execution of the SMV test
You can set up and run a single test at a user-defined future time. You can also set up and run tests on a regular schedule.
Manage scheduled test execution using the display
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Figure 11-5: SMV – Top-level menu
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll EXIT
Scroll Select
2. Scroll to Schedule Verfy and press Select .
3. To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution: a) Scroll to Set Next and press Select .
b) Enter the number of hours that the transmitter will wait before beginning the test.
4. To schedule recurring execution: a) Scroll to Set Recur and press Select .
b) Enter the number of hours that will elapse between tests.
5. To disable scheduled execution:
148 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Set Next to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Set Recur to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, choose Turn Off Sched when you enter the Smart Meter
Verification menu.
SMV flowchart: Scheduling test execution using the display
Figure 11-6: Scheduling SMV test execution using the display
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
No Schedule set?
SCHED IS OFF
Scroll
Yes
TURN OFF SCHED/YES?
Scroll
HOURS LEFT
Scroll Select xx HOURS
Select
Select
Schedule deleted
SET NEXT
Select xx HOURS
Scroll
SAVE/YES?
No Yes
Select
Scroll SET RECUR
Select xx HOURS
Scroll
SAVE/YES?
No Yes
Select
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
Select
Configuration and Use Manual 149
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Manage scheduled test execution using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Schedule Meter Verification .
2. To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution, specify a value for Hours Until Next
Run .
3. To schedule recurring execution, specify a value for Hours Between Recurring Runs .
4. To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Hours Until Next Run to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Hours Between Recurring Runs to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, click Disable Scheduled Execution .
Manage scheduled test execution using the Field Communicator
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
• Overview → Shortcuts → Meter Verification
• Service Tools → Maintenance → Routine Maintenance → Meter Verification
2. Choose Automatic Verification .
3. To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution, specify a value for Hrs Until Next Run .
4. To schedule recurring execution, specify a value for Set Recurring Hours .
5. To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Hrs Until Next Run to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Set Recurring Hours to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, choose Turn Off Schedule .
11.3 Use Production Volume Reconciliation, Transient
Mist Remediation, and Transient Bubble Remediation
For detailed information about Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR), Transient Mist Remediation (TMR), and Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR), see the Micro Motion Oil and Gas Production Supplement .
Restriction
PVR, TBR, and TMR are available only with a transmitter that is ordered with one of these software options:
• An 800 Enhanced Core Processor version 4.4 and later
• HART with HART 7 enabled in order to view process variables over HART (default)
Restriction
PVR, TBR, and TMR process variables are available only over HART with HART 7 enabled (default). PVR,
TBR, and TMR parameters cannot be configured with HART.
150 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
11.3.1 PVR, TBR, and TMR applications
PVR, TBR, and TMR are applications designed to provide more accurate process data in the presence of multiple phases. For example, if bubbles are present in the process fluid, or the process fluid is flashing, the volume measurements are often incorrect.
Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR)
• Provides oil and water volumes through density-based calculations for both line and reference conditions
• Detects bubble entrainment or flashing in the sensor, and can correct volumes accordingly
• Best for undersized three-phase separators that frequently have intermittent gas or water contamination in the oil leg
• Offers a simple, low-cost solution for net oil and net water measurement for two-phase separators
Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR)
• Used with single-component liquid streams that may experience intermittent low levels of gas entrainment, that is, gas carryunder
• Enables accurate measurement of a single fluid during periods of entrained gas by providing a substitute density value based on the immediately preceding process density (standard configuration)
• Tracks total time of aerated flow to assist in diagnosing process issues that may cause aeration
Transient Mist Remediation (TMR)
• Used with gas streams that may experience intermittent low levels of liquid entrainment, i.e., liquid carryover
• Allows gas measurement to continue during periods of entrained liquid (mist) by providing a substitute flow rate value based on the immediately preceding process flow rate
• Returns to reporting the measured flow rate when the mist interval is over, increased or decreased by a maximum of 10%, until flow totals are appropriately adjusted for the unmeasured flow
• Provides an indication of the amount of time that liquid was present in the stream — identifying process improvements to reduce gas stream contamination
11.4 Piecewise linearization (PWL) for calibrating gas meters
Piecewise linearization (PWL) can linearize the measurements of flow meters for greater accuracy in order to measure gas over a wide range of flow rates. PWL does not apply when measuring liquid flow. When better accuracy is required over the published gas measurement specifications, an Emerson-approved independent gas laboratory can calibrate gas up to 10 PWL adjustment points.
Restriction
You cannot use a field communicator to configure PWL.
For more information, see the white paper, The Practical Application of Multi-Point Piecewise Linear Interpolation
(PWL) and Other Developing Trends with Coriolis Meters for Natural Gas Custody Transfer Applications , available at
Emerson.com
.
Configuration and Use Manual 151
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
11.4.1 Configure PWL
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Not available
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Piecewise Linearization for Gas (PWL)
Not available
11.5 Use the fuel consumption application
For detailed information about fuel consumption, see the Micro Motion ™
Transmitters Installation and Operation Guide .
Fuel Consumption Application for
Restriction
Fuel consumption process variables are available only over HART with HART 7 enabled (default). Fuel consumption parameters cannot be configured with HART.
11.5.1 Fuel consumption application architecture
The Fuel consumption application is designed to support fuel efficiency and fuel management projects and practices by providing accurate real-time fuel consumption data.
• Automatically calculates the fluid consumption between two Coriolis flow sensors, typically for recirculating fuel consumption loops
• Eliminates the need to program an external calculation system and minimizes common inaccuracies related to time lag, sampling issues and cumulative errors
• Uses a proprietary algorithm that adapts to the unique calibration of each pair of Coriolis flow sensors
152 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
A. Standard process variables
B. Standard and differential process variables
C. Supply transmitter
D. Return transmitter
E. HART cable
F. Engine
G. Supply sensor
H. Return sensor
I. Storage tank
11.6 Zero the meter
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFFLINE MAINT → ZERO → CAL ZERO → CAL/YES?
To restore the zero value set at the factory: OFFLINE MAINT → ZERO → RESTORE ZERO → RESTORE/YES?
This function requires the enhanced core processor.
Device Tools → Calibration → Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate Zero
Service Tools → Maintenance → Zero Calibration → Perform Auto Zero
Zeroing the meter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Prerequisites
Verify the zero and prepare the meter using the procedures in Verify the zero .
Procedure
Zero the meter.
If necessary, modify Zero Time . Zero Time controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point. The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate.
Configuration and Use Manual 153
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves. Verify that the sensor tubes are full.
Need help?
If the zero fails:
• Verify that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
• Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
• Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
• If the zero continues to fail, contact customer service.
11.7 Validate the meter
Display
ProLink III
Field Communicator
OFF-LINE MAINT → Config MTR F
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Flow
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Density
Meter validation compares flowmeter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external measurement standard. If the transmitter value for mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. The flowmeter’s actual measurement is multiplied by the meter factor, and the resulting value is reported and used in further processing.
Prerequisites
Identify the meter factor(s) that you will calculate and set. You may set any combination of the three meter factors: mass flow, volume flow, and density. Note that all three meter factors are independent:
• The meter factor for mass flow affects only the value reported for mass flow.
• The meter factor for density affects only the value reported for density.
• The meter factor for volume flow affects only the value reported for volume flow or gas standard volume flow.
Important
To adjust volume flow, you must set the meter factor for volume flow. Setting a meter factor for mass flow and a meter factor for density will not produce the desired result. The volume flow calculations are based on original mass flow and density values, before the corresponding meter factors have been applied.
If you plan to calculate the meter factor for volume flow, be aware that validating volume in the field may be expensive, and the procedure may be hazardous for some process fluids. Therefore, because volume is inversely proportional to density, an alternative to direct measurement is to calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor for density. See
Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow
for instructions on this method.
Obtain a reference device (external measurement device) for the appropriate process variable.
154 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
Important
For good results, the reference device must be highly accurate.
Procedure
1. Determine the meter factor as follows: a) Set the meter factor to 1 to take a sample measurement.
b) Measure the same sample using the reference device.
c) Calculate the meter factor using the following formula:
NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor ×
ReferenceMeasurement
FlowmeterMeasurement
2. Ensure that the calculated meter factor does not fall outside 0.98 and 1.02. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact customer service.
3. Configure the meter factor in the transmitter.
Calculating the meter factor for mass flow
The flowmeter is installed and validated for the first time. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is
250.27 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250 lb. The mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFactor
MassFlow = 1 ×
250
250.27
= 0.9989
The first meter factor for mass flow is 0.9989.
One year later, the flowmeter is validated again. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is
250.07 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250.25 lb. The new mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFactor = 0.9996
The new meter factor for mass flow is 0.9996.
11.7.1 Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow
The alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow is used to avoid the difficulties that may be associated with the standard method.
This alternate method is based on the fact that volume is inversely proportional to density. It provides partial correction of the volume flow measurement by adjusting for the portion of the total offset that is caused by the density measurement offset. Use this method only when a volume flow reference is not available, but a density reference is available.
Procedure
1. Calculate the meter factor for density, using the standard method.
2. Calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor for density:
MeterFactor
Volume =
1
MeterFactorDensity
Configuration and Use Manual 155
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
The following equation is mathematically equivalent to the first equation. You may use whichever version you prefer.
MeterFactor
Volume =
ConfiguredMeterFactor
Density ×
DensityFlowmeter
DensityReferenceDevice
3. Ensure that the calculated meter factor does not fall outside 0.98 and 1.02. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact customer service.
4. Configure the meter factor for volume flow in the transmitter.
11.8 Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration
Density calibration establishes the relationship between the density of the calibration fluids and the signal produced at the sensor. Density calibration includes the calibration of the D1 (low-density) and D2 (highdensity) calibration points.
Important
Micro Motion flow meters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.
Calibrate the flow meter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact customer support before calibrating the flow meter.
Tip
Use meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
• D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (high-density) fluid. You may use air and water.
• If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this, choose Configure → Manual Setup →
Measurements → LD Optimization . LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. In some installations, only customer service has access to this parameter. If this is the case, contact customer service before continuing.
• If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this using a field communicator, choose
Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Optional Setup → LD Optimization . LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. If you are not using a field communicator, contact Emerson before continuing.
• The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Restriction
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the D2 calibration must be performed on water.
156 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
11.8.1 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
2. See the following figure.
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
11.8.2 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using a field communicator
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
Configuration and Use Manual 157
Measurement support
October 2022
2. See the following figure.
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
11.9 Perform a D3 and D4 density calibration (T-Series sensors only)
For T-Series sensors, the optional D3 and D4 calibration could improve the accuracy of the density measurement if the density of your process fluid is less than 0.8 g/cm 3 or greater than 1.2 g/cm 3 .
If you perform the D3 and D4 calibration, note the following:
• Do not perform the D1 and D2 calibration.
• Perform the D3 calibration if you have one calibrated fluid.
• Perform both the D3 and D4 calibrations if you have two calibrated fluids (other than air and water). The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
158 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
• For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
— Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm 3
— Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm 3 between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water.
• For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
— Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm 3
— Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm 3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3 fluid.
The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the density of the D3 fluid.
— Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm 3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water.
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
11.9.1 Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using
ProLink III
Procedure
.
Figure 11-7: D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using ProLink III
Configuration and Use Manual 159
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
11.9.2 Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using the Field
Communicator
Procedure
See the following flowchart.
Figure 11-8: D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using the Field Communicator
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D3 Calibration
Fill sensor with D3 fluid
On-Line Menu >
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 3 T-Series
Calibration Method executes
Enter density of D3 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration Complete message
OK
Home
D4 Calibration
Fill sensor with D4 fluid
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 4 T-Series
Calibration Method executes
Enter density of D4 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration Complete message
OK
Home
Done
160 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
11.10 Perform temperature calibration
Temperature calibration establishes the relationship between the temperature of the calibration fluids and the signal produced by the sensor.
Prerequisites
The temperature calibration is a two-part procedure: temperature offset calibration and temperature slope calibration. The two parts must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Ensure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption. You will need a low-temperature calibration fluid and a high-temperature calibration fluid. You will not see the effect of the calibration until both the temperature offset calibration and the temperature slope calibration are complete.
Important
Consult customer support before performing a temperature calibration. Under normal circumstances, the temperature circuit is stable and should not need an adjustment.
11.10.1 Perform temperature calibration using the display
Procedure
1. Fill the sensor with the low-temperature fluid.
2. Wait until the sensor achieves thermal equilibrium.
3. Navigate to the calibration menu and enter it.
a) Activate Scroll and Select simultaneously.
b) Scroll to OFF-LINE MAINT and activate Select .
c) Scroll to OFF-LINE CAL and activate Select .
d) Scroll to CAL TEMP and activate Select .
4. Enter the temperature of the low-temperature fluid.
a) When CAL OFFSET TEMP is flashing, activate Select .
b) Enter the temperature value and save it.
5. Fill the sensor with the high-temperature fluid.
6. Wait until the sensor achieves thermal equilibrium.
7. Enter the temperature of the high-temperature fluid.
a) When CAL SLOPE TEMP is flashing, activate Select .
b) Enter the temperature value and save it.
8. Activate Scroll to view the new offset and slope values.
9. Activate Select to exit.
11.10.2 Perform temperature calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
See the following figure.
Configuration and Use Manual 161
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Temperature Offset Calibration
Fill sensor with low-temperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Temperature Calibration >
Temperature Calibration - Offset
Enter temperature of low-temperature fluid
Start Calibration
Temperature Slope Calibration
Fill sensor with high-temperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Temperature Calibration >
Temperature Calibration - Slope
Enter temperature of high-temperature fluid
Start Calibration
Done
162 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Measurement support
October 2022
11.10.3 Perform temperature calibration using the Field
Communicator
Procedure
Temperature Offset calibration
Fill sensor with lowtemperature fluid
Temperature Slope calibration
Fill sensor with hightemperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Calibration >
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Calibration >
Temperature Calibration
Offset
Enter temperature of lowtemperature fluid
Next
Calibration in Progress
Temperature Calibration
Slope
Enter temperature of hightemperature fluid
Next
Calibration in Progress
Calibration Complete
Next
Calibration Complete
Finish
Done
Configuration and Use Manual 163
Measurement support
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
164 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
12 Troubleshooting
12.1 Status LED states
The status LED on the transmitter indicates whether or not alerts are active. If alerts are active, view the alert list to identify the alerts, then take appropriate action to correct the alert condition.
Your transmitter has a status LED only if it has a display.
If the transmitter has a display and LED Blinking is disabled, the status LED does not flash to indicate an unacknowledged alert.
LED state
Solid green
Flashing green (if enabled)
Solid yellow
Flashing yellow (if enabled)
Solid red
Flashing red (if enabled)
Description
No alerts are active.
Unacknowledged corrected condition (no alert)
One or more low-severity alerts are active.
A low severity alarm can mean one or more process variables is at a set output level (i.e.
simulation or two phase timeout).
Calibration in progress, or Known Density
Verification in progress.
One or more low-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
One or more high-severity alerts are active.
One or more high-severity alerts are active and have not been acknowledged.
Recommendation
Continue with configuration or process measurement.
Continue with configuration or process measurement. Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A low-severity alert condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement, but Micro Motion still recommends identifying and resolving the alert condition.
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
A high-severity alert condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior.
Resolve the alert condition before continuing.
Acknowledge the alert if you choose.
12.2 Check the cutoffs
If the transmitter cutoffs are configured incorrectly, the transmitter may report zero flow when flow is present, or very small amounts of flow under no-flow conditions.
There are separate cutoff parameters for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, gas standard volume flow rate (if applicable), and density. There is an independent cutoff for the mA Output on your transmitter. The interaction between cutoffs sometimes produces unexpected results.
Procedure
Verify the configuration of all cutoffs.
Configuration and Use Manual 165
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Tip
For typical applications, set Mass Flow Cutoff between 0.1% of the nominal flow rate of the attached sensor.
See the sensor specifications for nominal flow rate data.
12.3 Check the core processor LED
The core processor has an LED that indicates different meter conditions.
Procedure
1. Maintain power to the transmitter.
2. If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation: a) Remove the core processor lid. The core processor is intrinsically safe and can be opened in all environments.
b) Check the state of the core processor LED.
3. If you have an integral installation: a) Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base.
Figure 12-1: Integral installation components
166
A. Transmitter
B. Transition ring
C. 4 x cap screws (4 mm)
D. Base
E. Core processor b) Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.
c) Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws.
Important
Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
d) Check the state of the core processor LED.
Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
4. If you have a 9-wire remote installation: a) Remove the end-cap.
Figure 12-2: 9-wire remote installation components
Troubleshooting
October 2022
A. Transmitter
B. Core processor
C. 4 x cap screws (4 mm)
D. End cap b) Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor mounting plate in place.
Do not remove the screws.
c) Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the unlocked position.
d) Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of the core processor is visible.
Important
Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
e) Check the state of the core processor LED.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
• For a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation, replace the core processor lid.
• For an integral installation:
Configuration and Use Manual 167
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
1. Without pinching or stretching the wires, lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots.
2. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
3. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2.3 to 3.4 N-m).
• For a 9-wire remote installation:
1. Without pinching or stressing the wires, slide the mounting plate into place.
2. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the locked position.
3. Tighten the screws, torquing to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0.7 to 0.9 N-m).
4. Replace the end-cap.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
12.3.1 Core processor LED states
Table 12-1: Standard core processor LED states
LED state
1 flash per second (ON 25%, OFF
75%)
1 flash per second (ON 75%, OFF
25%)
Solid ON
Description
Normal operation
Slug flow (two-phase flow)
3 rapid flashes, followed by pause
4 flashes per second
OFF
Zero or calibration in progress
Core processor receiving between 11.5 and 5 volts
Sensor not recognized
Improper configuration
Broken pin between sensor and core processor
Fault condition
Core processor receiving less than 5 volts
Recommended actions
No action required.
See
Check for two-phase flow (slug flow) .
No action required.
Check power supply to transmitter.
Check wiring between transmitter and sensor.
Check sensor characterization parameters.
The meter requires factory service.
Core processor internal failure
Check alert status.
• Verify power supply wiring to core processor.
• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible – the meter may require factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
168 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Table 12-2: Enhanced core processor LED states
LED state
Solid green
Flashing yellow
Solid yellow
Solid red
Flashing red (80% on, 20% off)
Flashing red (50% on, 50% off)
Flashing red (50% on, 50% off, skips every 4th)
OFF
Description
Normal operation
Zero in progress
Low-severity alert
High-severity alert
Tubes not full
Electronics failed
Sensor failed
Core processor receiving less than 5 volts
Core processor internal failure
Recommended action
No action required.
No action required.
Check alert status.
Check alert status.
• If alert A105 (slug flow) is active, refer to the recommended actions for that alert.
• If alert A033 (tubes not full) is active, verify process. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, or coating in tubes.
The meter requires factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
• Verify power supply wiring to core processor.
• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible – the meter may require factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
12.4 Perform a 700 core processor resistance test
Note
You can perform a resistance test only on a 700 core processor.
Procedure
1. Power down the transmitter.
2. If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation, remove the core processor lid.
3. If you have an integral installation: a) Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base.
Configuration and Use Manual 169
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
A. Transmitter
B. Transition ring
C. 4 x cap screws (4 mm)
D. Base
E. Core processor b) Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.
c) Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws.
4. If you have a 9-wire remote installation: a) Remove the end-cap.
170 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Figure 12-3: 9-wire remote installation components
Troubleshooting
October 2022
A. Transmitter
B. Core processor
C. 4 x cap screws (4 mm)
D. End-cap b) Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor mounting plate in place.
Do not remove the screws.
c) Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the unlocked position.
d) Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of the core processor is visible.
5. At the core processor, disconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
6. Measure the resistance between core processor terminal pairs 3–4, 2–3, and 2–4.
Terminal pair
3–4
2–3
2–4
Function
RS-485/A and RS-485/B
VDC– and RS-485/A
VDC– and RS-485/B
Expected resistance
40 kΩ to 50 kΩ
20 kΩ to 25 kΩ
20 kΩ to 25 kΩ
7. If any resistance measurements are lower than specified, the core processor may not be able to communicate with a transmitter or a remote host. The meter may need factory service.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
• For a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation:
Configuration and Use Manual 171
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Replace the core processor lid.
3. Restore power to the transmitter.
• For an integral installation:
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Without pinching or stretching the wires, lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots.
3. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
4. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2.3 to 3.4 N-m).
5. Restore power to the transmitter.
• For a 9-wire remote installation:
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Without pinching or stressing the wires, slide the mounting plate into place.
3. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the locked position.
4. Tighten the screws, torquing to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0.7 to 0.9 N-m).
5. Replace the end-cap.
6. Restore power to the transmitter.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
12.5 Density measurement problems
Problem
Inaccurate density reading
Possible causes
• Problem with process fluid
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Wiring problem
• Incorrect grounding
• Two-phase flow
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• RTD failure
• Physical characteristics of sensor have changed
Recommended actions
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
• Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• Check the grounding of all components.
• Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• If two sensors with similar frequency are too near each other, separate them.
• Purge the sensor tubes.
172 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Problem
Unusually high density reading
Possible causes
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Incorrect temperature measurement
• RTD problem
• In high-frequency meters, this can indicate erosion or corrosion
• In low-frequency meters, this can indicate tube fouling
Recommended actions
• Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Purge the sensor tubes.
• Check for coating in the flow tubes.
Unusually low density reading
• Two-phase flow
• Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• In low-frequency meters, this can indicate erosion or corrosion
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• Check for tube erosion, especially if the process fluid is abrasive.
12.6 Discrete Input problems
Problem
Discrete Input is fixed and does not respond to input switch
Recommended actions
Verify that the Discrete Input is wired and configured correctly for your application. Internal means that the transmitter will supply power. External means that an external pull-up resistor and source are required.
12.7 Discrete output problems
Problem
Cannot configure
Channel B to operate as DO1
No discrete output
Possible causes
Invalid channel configuration
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Loop test failed • Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
Recommended actions
FO and DO1 use the same circuitry and cannot run simultaneously. Configure Channel B as FO and Channel C as DO2.
• Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
• Verify the output wiring.
• Contact customer service.
• Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
• Verify the output wiring.
• Contact customer service.
Configuration and Use Manual 173
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Problem
Discrete output readings reversed
Possible causes
• Wiring problem
• Configuration does not match wiring
Recommended actions
• Verify the output wiring.
• Ensure that Discrete Output Polarity is set correctly.
12.8 Check the drive gain
Excessive or erratic drive gain may indicate any of a variety of process conditions or sensor problems.
To know whether your drive gain is excessive or erratic, you must collect drive gain data during the problem condition and compare it to drive gain data from a period of normal operation.
Excessive (saturated) drive gain
Table 12-3: Possible causes and recommended actions for excessive (saturated) drive gain
Possible cause
Bent sensor tube
Cavitation or flashing; settling of two-phase or three-phase fluids
Recommended actions
Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage
). If either of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), the sensor tubes may be bent. The sensor will need to be replaced.
• Increase the inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
• If a pump is located upstream from the sensor, increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
• The sensor may need to be reoriented or repositioned. Consult the installation manual for your sensor.
Cracked sensor tube
Core processor or module failure
Flow rate out of range
Incorrect sensor characterization
Open drive or pickoff sensor coil
Over-pressurized tubes
Plugged sensor tube
Replace the sensor.
Contact customer support.
Ensure that the flow rate is within sensor limits.
Verify the characterization or calibration parameters.
Contact customer support.
Sensor case full of process fluid
Sensor imbalance
Sensor tubes not completely full
Two-phase flow
Contact customer support.
A dull, audible hum, and unusually high sensor vibration is usually accompanied by high,
even saturated, drive gain. Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage ). If
either of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), plugged tubes may be the source of your problem. Purge the tubes. In extreme cases, you may need to replace the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact customer support.
Correct process conditions so that the sensor tubes are full.
Check for two-phase flow. See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
.
174 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Table 12-3: Possible causes and recommended actions for excessive (saturated) drive gain (continued)
Possible cause
Vibrating element not free to vibrate
Recommended actions
Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate.
Erratic drive gain
Table 12-4: Possible causes and recommended actions for erratic drive gain
Possible cause
Two-phase flow
Polarity of pick-off reversed or polarity of drive reversed
Foreign material caught in sensor tubes
Recommended actions
Check for two-phase flow. See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
.
Applicable for a 9-wire sensor. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• Purge the sensor tubes.
• Replace the sensor.
12.8.1 Collect drive gain data
Drive gain data can be used to diagnose a variety of process and equipment conditions. Collect drive gain data from a period of normal operation, and use this data as a baseline for troubleshooting.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the drive gain data.
2. Observe and record drive gain data over an appropriate period of time, under a variety of process conditions.
12.9 Check for internal electrical problems
Shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case can cause the sensor to stop working.
Possible cause
Moisture inside the sensor junction box
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case
Internally shorted feedthrough
Faulty cable
Improper wire termination
Shorts to the housing created by trapped or damaged wires
Loose wires or connectors
Recommended action
Ensure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is present.
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
Replace the cable.
Verify wire terminations inside the sensor junction box. See
Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and
Installation Manual Micro Motion 9-Wire Flow Meter Cable
Preparation and Installation Guide .
Contact customer support.
Contact customer support.
Configuration and Use Manual 175
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Possible cause
Liquid or moisture inside the housing
Recommended action
Contact customer support.
12.9.1 Check the sensor coils
Checking the sensor coils can identify a cause for a no sensor response alert.
Restriction
This procedure applies only to 9-wire remote-mount transmitters and remote transmitters with remote core processors.
Procedure
1. Disconnect power to the transmitter.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Remove the end-cap from the core processor housing.
3. Unplug the terminal blocks from the terminal board on the core processor.
4. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the pickoff coils by placing the DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair. See the following table for a list of the coils. Record the values.
Table 12-5: Coils and test terminal pairs
Coil
Drive coil
Left pickoff coil (LPO)
Right pickoff coil (RPO)
Resistance temperature detector
(RTD)
Lead length compensator (LLC)
Sensor model
All
All
All
All
Terminal colors
Brown to red
Green to white
Blue to gray
Yellow to violet
Composite RTD
Fixed resistor (see note)
All except T-Series and CMF400 (see note)
Yellow to orange
All CMFSs, T-Series, H300, and F300 Yellow to orange
CMFS007, CMFS010, CMFS015,
CMF400, and F300
Yellow to orange
Note
The fixed resistor on F300/H300/CMF400 sensors adds ∼ 40 ohms to the reading between the yellow and orange leads and applies to only specific sensor releases. Contact customer support for more information.
There should be no open circuits, that is, no infinite resistance readings. The left pickoff and right pickoff readings should be the same or very close (±5 Ω). If there are any unusual readings, repeat the coil resistance tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.
176 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
5. Test the terminals in the sensor junction box for shorts to case.
Test results will be inconclusive with nonconductive process fluids such as hydrocarbons.
a) Leave the terminal blocks disconnected.
b) Remove the lid of the junction box.
c) Testing one terminal at a time, place a DMM lead on the terminal and the other lead on the sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
6. Test the resistance of junction box terminal pairs.
a) Test the brown terminal against all other terminals except the red one.
b) Test the red terminal against all other terminals except the brown one.
c) Test the green terminal against all other terminals except the white one.
d) Test the white terminal against all other terminals except the green one.
e) Test the blue terminal against all other terminals except the gray one.
f) Test the gray terminal against all other terminals except the blue one.
g) Test the orange terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and violet ones.
h) Test the yellow terminal against all other terminals except the orange and violet ones.
i) Test the violet terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and orange ones.
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short between terminals.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
1. Plug the terminal blocks into the terminal board.
2. Replace the end-cap on the core processor housing.
3. Replace the lid on the sensor junction box.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
12.10 Check Flow Direction
If Flow Direction is set inappropriately for your process, the transmitter may report flow data that is not appropriate for your requirements.
The Flow Direction parameter interacts with actual flow direction to affect flow values, flow totals and inventories, and output behavior. For the simplest operation, actual process flow should match the flow arrow that is on the side of the sensor case.
Configuration and Use Manual 177
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Procedure
1. Verify the actual direction of process flow through the sensor.
2. Verify the configuration of Flow Direction .
12.11 Flow measurement problems
Problem
Non-zero flow reading at no-flow conditions or at zero offset
Erratic non-zero flow rate at no-flow conditions
Possible causes
• Misaligned piping (especially in new installations)
• Open or leaking valve
• Incorrect sensor zero
• Leaking valve or seal
• Two-phase flow
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• Wiring problem
• Vibration in pipeline at rate close to sensor tube frequency
• Damping value too low
• Mounting stress on sensor
• Empty sensor when reading liquid volume flow
Recommended actions
• If the reading is not excessively high, review the live zero. You may need to restore the factory zero.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for mounting stress on the sensor
(e.g., sensor being used to support piping, misaligned piping).
• Contact customer support.
• Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application (refer to the sensor installation manual).
• Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
• If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9-wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
• Purge the sensor tubes.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for sources of vibration.
• Verify damping configuration.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• Check for radio frequency interference.
• Contact customer support.
178 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Problem
Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow is steady
Possible causes
• Two-phase flow
• Damping value too low
• Plugged or coated sensor tube
• Output wiring problem
• Problem with receiving device
• Wiring problem
Recommended actions
• Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application (refer to the sensor installation manual).
• Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
• If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9-wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
• Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
• Purge the sensor tubes.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for sources of vibration.
• Verify damping configuration.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• Check for radio frequency interference.
• Contact customer support.
Inaccurate flow rate or batch total
• Wiring problem
• Inappropriate measurement unit
• Incorrect flow calibration factor
• Incorrect meter factor
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Incorrect grounding
• Two-phase flow
• Problem with receiving device
• Incorrect sensor zero
• Incorrect measurement unit configured for a process variable - for example, selecting g/min instead of USGPM
• Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
• Perform a bucket test to verify batch totals.
• Zero the meter.
• Check the grounding of all components.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Check sensor coil resistance and for shorts to case.
• Replace the core processor or transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual 179
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
12.12 Frequency Output problems
Table 12-6: Frequency Output problems and recommended actions
Problem Possible causes
No Frequency Output • Stopped totalizer
• Process condition below cutoff
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to
Internal Zero or Downscale
• Two-phase flow
• Flow in reverse direction from configured flow direction parameter
• Bad frequency receiving device
• Output level not compatible with receiving device
• Bad output circuit (rarely occurs)
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
• Output not powered
• Wiring problem
Recommended actions
• Verify that the process conditions are below the low-flow cutoff. Reconfigure the low-flow cutoff if necessary.
• Check the Fault Action settings.
• Verify that the totalizers are not stopped. A stopped totalizer will cause the Frequency
Output to be locked.
• Check for two-phase flow.
• Check flow direction.
• Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a Frequency Output.
• Verify the power configuration for the
Frequency Output (internal vs. external).
• Perform a loop test.
Consistently incorrect frequency measurement
• Output not scaled correctly
• Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
• Check the Frequency Output scaling.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
Erratic Frequency
Output
• Radio frequency interference (RFI) from environment
• Check for radio frequency interference.
Phase on Channel C does not change with flow direction
Cannot configure
Channel C for
Frequency Output operation
• The Frequency Output mode is not configured to show flow direction
• Invalid channel selections
• Check the Frequency Output mode.
• FO and DO1 use the same circuitry and cannot run simultaneously. Configure
Channel B as FO and Channel C as DO2.
12.13 Check Frequency Output Fault Action
The Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the Frequency Output is reporting a constant value, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, consider the following options:
180 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
• Change the setting of Frequency Output Fault Action .
• For the relevant status alerts, change the setting of Alert Severity to Ignore.
Restriction
For some status alerts, Alert Severity is not configurable.
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
12.14 Check Frequency Output Mode
If the transmitter is configured for two Frequency Outputs, and Frequency Output Mode is not configured correctly for your application, the Frequency Outputs may exhibit unexpected behavior.
Frequency Output Mode is used only to define the relationship between two Frequency Outputs. If your transmitter is not configured for two Frequency Outputs, Frequency Output Mode is not causing your output problem.
Procedure
Verify the configuration of Frequency Output Mode .
12.15 Check Frequency Output Scaling Method
If Frequency Output Scaling Method is set incorrectly, the Frequency Output may report an incorrect value.
Procedure
1. Verify the configuration of the Frequency Output.
2. If you changed the setting of Frequency Output Scaling Method , check the settings of all other
Frequency Output parameters.
12.16 Check grounding
The sensor and the transmitter must be grounded. If the core processor is installed as part of the transmitter or the sensor, it is grounded automatically. If the core processor is installed separately, it must be grounded separately.
Prerequisites
You will need an:
• Installation manual for your sensor
• Installation manual for your transmitter (remote-mount installations only)
Procedure
Refer to the sensor and transmitter installation manuals for grounding requirements and instructions.
Configuration and Use Manual 181
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
12.17 Locate a device using the HART 7 Squawk feature
The Squawk feature causes the device to show a specific pattern on its display. You can use this to locate or identify a device.
Restriction
The Squawk feature is available only with HART 7 connections from a field communicator. It is not available with ProLink III.
Procedure
A 0-0-0-0 pattern is shown on the display.
12.18 Check HART
®
Address and mA Output Action
If the transmitter is producing a fixed current from the mA Output, the mA Output Action parameter may be set incorrectly.
When the mA Output Action parameter is set to Fixed, the mA Output produces a fixed value, and does not report process data or implement its fault action.
When HART Address is changed, some configuration tools will automatically change mA Output Action .
Tip
Always verify mA Output Action after setting or changing HART Address .
Procedure
1. Set HART Address as appropriate for your HART network.
The default address is 0. This is the recommended value unless the transmitter is in a multidrop network.
2. Set mA Output Action to Live.
12.19 Check HART
®
burst mode
HART burst mode is normally disabled, and should be enabled only if a HART Triloop is being used.
Procedure
1. Check to see if burst mode is enabled or disabled.
2. If burst mode is enabled, disable it.
12.20 Check the HART
®
communication loop
If you cannot establish or maintain HART communications, the HART loop may be wired incorrectly.
Prerequisites
You will need:
• A copy of your transmitter installation manual
182 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
• A 250–600 Ω resistor
• A Field Communicator
• Optional: the HART Application Guide , available at www.hartcomm.org
Procedure
1. Verify that the loop wires are connected as shown in the wiring diagrams in the transmitter installation manual.
If your HART network is more complex than the wiring diagrams in the transmitter installation manual, contact either customer service or the HART Communication Foundation.
2. Disconnect the primary mA Output wiring from the transmitter.
3. Install a 250–600 Ω resistor across the transmitter’s primary mA Output terminals.
4. Check the voltage drop across the resistor (4–20 mA = 1–5 VDC for a 250 Ω resistor).
If voltage drop is less than 1 VDC, add resistance to achieve a voltage drop of greater than 1 VDC .
5. Connect a Field Communicator directly across the resistor and attempt to communicate (poll).
If communication with the transmitter cannot be established, the transmitter may need service.
Contact customer service.
12.21 Perform loop tests
A loop test is a way to verify that the transmitter and the remote device are communicating properly. A loop test also helps you know whether you need to trim mA Outputs.
Prerequisites
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
12.21.1 Perform loop tests using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Test the mA Output(s).
a) Choose OFFLINE MAINT → SIM → AO1 SIM or OFFLINE MAINT → SIM → AO2 SIM , and select a low value, e.g., 4 mA.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
Configuration and Use Manual 183
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053 c) At the transmitter, activate Select .
d) Scroll to and select a high value, e.g., 20 mA.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
e) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
f) At the transmitter, activate Select .
2. Test the Frequency Output(s).
a) Choose OFFLINE MAINT → SIM → FO SIM , and select the Frequency Output value.
The Frequency Output can be set to 1, 10, or 15 kHz.
Note
If the Weights & Measures application with NTEP approval is enabled on the transmitter, it is not possible to perform a loop test of the Frequency Output, even when the transmitter is unsecured.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b) Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
c) At the transmitter, activate Select .
3. Test the Discrete Output(s).
a) Choose OFFLINE MAINT → SIM → DO1 SIM or OFFLINE MAINT → SIM → DO2 SIM , and select
SET ON .
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
c) At the transmitter, activate Select .
d) Scroll to and select SET OFF .
e) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
f) At the transmitter, activate Select .
4. Test the Discrete Input.
a) Set the remote input device to generate a known fixed current.
b) At the transmitter, choose OFFLINE MAINT → SIM , and select READ DI .
c) At the transmitter, activate Select .
d) Verify the signal at the transmitter.
e) Repeat the procedure for the other signal state.
184 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 20 microamps of the expected values, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 20 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
• If the Discrete Input readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Input Polarity .
12.21.2 Perform loop tests using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1. Test the mA Output(s).
a) Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → mA Output 1 Test or Device Tools →
Diagnostics → Testing → mA Output 2 Test .
b) Enter 4 in Fix to: .
c) Select Fix mA .
d) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
e) Select UnFix mA .
f) Enter 20 in Fix to: .
g) Select Fix mA .
h) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
i) Select UnFix mA .
2. Test the Frequency Output(s).
Note
If the Weights & Measures application with NTEP approval is enabled on the transmitter, it is not possible to perform a loop test of the Frequency Output, even when the transmitter is unsecured.
a) Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Frequency Output Test .
Configuration and Use Manual 185
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053 b) Enter the Frequency Output value in Fix to .
c) Select Fix FO .
d) Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
e) Select UnFix FO .
3. Test the Discrete Output(s).
a) Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Discrete Output Test .
b) If your transmitter is configured for two Discrete Outputs, determine which Discrete Output you want to test.
c) Set Fix To: to ON.
d) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
e) Set Fix To: to OFF.
f) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
g) Select UnFix .
h) Repeat for the other Discrete Output, if applicable.
4. Test the Discrete Input.
a) Set the remote input device to ON.
b) Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Discrete Input Test .
c) Verify the signal at the transmitter.
d) Set the remote input device to OFF.
e) Verify the signal at the transmitter.
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 20 microamps of the expected values, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 20 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
• If the Discrete Input readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Input Polarity .
12.21.3 Perform loop tests using the Field Communicator
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
186 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Procedure
1. Test the mA Output(s).
a) Choose Service Tools → Simulate → Simulate Outputs → mA Output 1 Loop Test or Service
Tools → Maintenance → Simulate Outputs → mA Output 2 Loop Test , and select 4 mA .
b) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
c) Press OK .
d) Select 20 mA .
e) Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
f) Press OK .
g) Choose End .
2. Test the Frequency Output(s).
Note
If the Weights & Measures application with NTEP approval is enabled on the transmitter, it is not possible to perform a loop test of the Frequency Output, even when the transmitter is unsecured.
a) Press Service Tools → Simulate → Simulate Outputs → Frequency Output Test , and choose the Frequency Output level.
b) Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
c) Choose End .
3. Test the Discrete Output(s).
a) Press Service Tools → Simulate → Simulate Outputs and choose Discrete Output 1 Test or
Discrete Output 2 Test .
b) Choose Off .
c) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
d) Press OK .
e) Choose On .
f) Verify the signal at the receiving device.
g) Press OK .
h) Choose End .
4. Test the Discrete Input.
a) Set the remote input device to ON.
Configuration and Use Manual 187
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053 b) Press 3 → 2 → 6 .
c) Verify the signal at the transmitter.
Postrequisites
• If the mA Output readings are within 20 microamps of the expected values, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 20 microamps, or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity .
12.22 Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
If the process variable assigned to the mA Output falls below the configured Lower Range Value (LRV) or rises above the configured Upper Range Value (URV), the meter will post a saturation alert (A100), then perform the configured fault action. If the process variable assigned to the mA Output falls below the configured
Lower Range Value (LRV) or rises above the configured Upper Range Value (URV), the meter will post an
Output Saturated alert for the affected output, then perform the configured fault action.
Procedure
1. Record your current process conditions.
2. Check the configuration of the LRV and URV.
12.23 Milliamp output problems
Table 12-7: Milliamp output problems and recommended actions
Problem
No mA Output
Possible causes
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure (rarely occurs)
• Channel not configured for desired output
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
Recommended actions
• If applicable, check the output wiring to verify that the output is powered.
• Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
• Verify the output wiring.
• Check the Fault Action settings.
• Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
• Contact customer support.
188 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Table 12-7: Milliamp output problems and recommended actions (continued)
Problem
Loop test failed
Possible causes
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure (rarely occurs)
• Channel not configured for desired output
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
Recommended actions
• If applicable, check the output wiring to verify that the output is powered.
• Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
• Verify the output wiring.
• Check the Fault Action settings.
• Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
• Contact customer support.
mA Output below
4 mA
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
• Output not powered
• Open in wiring
• Bad output circuit (rarely occurs)
• Process condition below LRV
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to
Internal Zero or Downscale
• Bad mA receiving device
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
• Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
• Check the Fault Action settings.
• Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
Constant mA Output • Incorrect process variable assigned to the output
• Fault condition exists
• Non-zero HART address (mA Output 1)
• Output is configured for loop test mode
• Zero calibration failure
• Output is configured for a range that is far in excess of intended range. Reconfigure output.
• The process condition is below cutoff.
• Verify the output variable assignments.
• View and resolve any existing alert conditions.
• Check the HART address. If the HART address is non-zero, you may need to change the setting of mA Output Action .
• Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
• Check HART burst mode configuration.
• If related to a zero calibration failure, cycle power to the meter and retry the zeroing procedure.
• Process condition is below cutoff. Check and adjust the cutoff setting.
Configuration and Use Manual 189
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table 12-7: Milliamp output problems and recommended actions (continued)
Problem mA Output consistently out of range
Possible causes
• Incorrect process variable or units assigned to output
• Fault condition if Fault Action is set to
Upscale or Downscale
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
Recommended actions
• Verify the output variable assignments.
• Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
• Check the Fault Action settings.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
• Check the mA Output trim.
Consistently incorrect mA measurement
• Loop problem
• Output not trimmed correctly
• Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
• Incorrect process variable configured
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
• Check the mA Output trim.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Verify the process variable assigned to the mA Output.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
mA Output correct at lower current, but incorrect at higher current
• mA loop resistance may be too high • Verify that the mA Output load resistance is below the maximum supported load (see the installation manual for your transmitter).
12.24 Check mA Output Fault Action
The mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the mA Output is reporting a constant value below 4 mA or above 20 mA, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, consider the following options:
• Change the setting of mA Output Fault Action .
• For the relevant status alerts, change the setting of Alert Severity to Ignore.
Restriction
For some status alerts, Alert Severity is not configurable.
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
190 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
12.25 Trim mA Output
Trimming an mA Output calibrates the transmitter mA Output to the receiving device. If the current trim value is inaccurate, the transmitter will under-compensate or over-compensate the output.
12.25.1 Trim mA Output using ProLink III
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Important
You must trim the output at both ends (4 mA and 20 mA to ensure that it is compensated accurately across the entire output range.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Calibration → MA Output Trim → mA Output 1 Trim .
2. Choose Device Tools → Calibration → MA Output Trim → mA Output 1 Trim or Device Tools →
Calibration → MA Output Trim → mA Output 2 Trim .
3. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
4. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than − 20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps, contact customer service.
12.25.2 Trim mA Outputs using a field communicator
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Important
You must trim the output at both ends (4 mA and 20 mA to ensure that it is compensated accurately across the entire output range.
Procedure
1. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
2. Choose .
3. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
4. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than − 20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps, contact customer service.
Configuration and Use Manual 191
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
12.26 Check the pickoff voltage
If the pickoff voltage readings are unusually low, you may have any of a variety of process or equipment problems.
To know whether your pickoff voltage is unusually low, you must collect pickoff voltage data during the problem condition and compare it to pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation.
Drive gain and pickoff voltage are inversely proportional. As drive gain increases, pickoff voltages decrease and vice versa.
Table 12-8: Possible causes and recommended actions for low pickoff voltage
Possible cause
Cavitation or flashing; settling of two-phase or three-phase fluids
Recommended actions
• Increase the inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
Increasing back pressure is recommended. Applying back pressure downstream from the sensor can prevent flashing inside the sensor tubes. That way, if the process fluid is going to flash, it will do so downstream from the sensor after it has been measured.
• If a pump is located upstream from the sensor, increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
• The sensor may need to be reoriented or repositioned.
Consult the installation manual for your sensor.
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and transmitter
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor
Two-phase flow
Sensor tubes are not vibrating
Moisture in the sensor electronics
The sensor is damaged, or sensor magnets may have become demagnetized
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter.
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the sensor.
Check for two-phase flow. See Check for two-phase flow
• Check for plugging or deposition.
• Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate (no mechanical binding).
• Verify wiring.
•
Test coils at sensor. See Check the sensor coils
.
Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
Replace the sensor.
12.26.1 Collect pickoff voltage data
Pickoff voltage data can be used to diagnose a variety of process and equipment conditions. Collect pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation, and use this data as a baseline for troubleshooting.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the pickoff voltage data.
192 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
2. Observe and record data for both the left pickoff and the right pickoff, over an appropriate period of time, under a variety of process conditions.
12.27 Check power supply wiring
If the power supply wiring is damaged or improperly connected, the transmitter may not receive enough power to operate properly.
Prerequisites
• You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
• When using DC power, a minimum of 1.5 amps of startup current is required.
Procedure
1. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter power supply terminals.
• If the voltage is within the specified range, you do not have a power supply problem.
• If the voltage is low, ensure that the power supply is adequate at the source, the power cable is sized correctly, there is no damage to the power cable, and an appropriate fuse is installed.
• If there is no power, continue with this procedure.
2.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
Before inspecting the power supply wiring, disconnect the power source.
3. Ensure that the terminals, wires, and wiring compartment are clean and dry.
4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals.
5. Ensure that the power supply wires are making good contact, and are not clamped to the wire insulation.
6. Inspect the voltage label inside the wiring compartment.
The voltage supplied to the transmitter should match the voltage specified on the label.
7.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not reapply power to the transmitter with the housing cover removed. Reapplying power to the transmitter while the housing cover is removed could cause an explosion.
Reapply power to the transmitter.
8. Test the voltage at the terminals.
If there is no power, contact customer service.
12.28 Check for radio frequency interference (RFI)
The transmitter Frequency Output or Discrete Output can be affected by radio frequency interference (RFI).
Possible sources of RFI include a source of radio emissions, or a large transformer, pump, or motor that can generate a strong electromagnetic field. Several methods to reduce RFI are available. Use one or more of the following suggestions, as appropriate to your installation.
Configuration and Use Manual 193
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Procedure
• Use shielded cable between the output and the receiving device.
— Terminate the shielding at the receiving device. If this is impossible, terminate the shielding at the cable gland or conduit fitting.
— Do not terminate the shielding inside the wiring compartment.
— 360-degree termination of shielding is unnecessary.
• Eliminate the RFI source.
• Move the transmitter.
12.29 Using sensor simulation for troubleshooting
When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports user-specified values for basic process variables.
This allows you to reproduce various process conditions or to test the system.
You can use sensor simulation to help distinguish between legitimate process noise and externally caused variation. For example, consider a receiving device that reports an unexpectedly erratic density value. If sensor simulation is enabled and the observed density value does not match the simulated value, the source of the problem is likely to be somewhere between the transmitter and the receiving device.
Sensor simulation requires an enhanced core and a communication device.
Important
When sensor simulation is active, the simulated value is used in all transmitter outputs and calculations, including totals and inventories, volume flow calculations, and concentration calculations. Disable all automatic functions related to the transmitter outputs and place the loop in manual operation. Do not enable simulation mode unless your application can tolerate these effects, and be sure to disable simulation mode when you have finished testing.
12.30 Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring
A number of power-supply and output problems may occur if the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter is improperly connected, or if the wiring becomes damaged.
Be sure to check all wiring segments:
• If you have a 9-wire transmitter, check the wiring between the transmitter and the sensor junction box.
Prerequisites
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Before opening the wiring compartments, disconnect the power source.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the information provided in the installation manual.
194 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
3. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
4. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
12.31 Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
Two-phase flow can cause rapid changes in the drive gain. This can cause a variety of measurement issues.
Procedure
1. Check for two-phase flow alerts (e.g., A105).
If the transmitter is not generating two-phase flow alerts, verify that two-phase flow limits have been set. If limits are set, two-phase flow is not the source of your problem.
2. Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
3. Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
4. Check the settings of Two-Phase Flow Low Limit , Two-Phase Flow High Limit , and Two-Phase Flow
Timeout .
Tip
You can reduce the occurrence of two-phase flow alerts by setting Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to a lower value, Two-Phase Flow High Limit to a higher value, or Two-Phase Flow Timeout to a higher value. Micro Motion recommends leaving the Two-Phase Flow High Limit at the default value.
12.32 Status alerts, causes, and recommendations
Not all of these alerts may apply to your type of transmitter.
12.32.1 A001
Alert
EEPROM Error (Core Processor)
Cause
The transmitter has detected a problem communicating with the sensor.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Replace the core processor.
3. Contact customer support.
12.32.2 A002
Alert
RAM Error (Core Processor)
Cause
The transmitter has detected a problem communicating with the sensor.
Configuration and Use Manual 195
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Replace the core processor.
3. Contact customer support.
12.32.3 A003
Alert
No Sensor Response
Cause
The transmitter is not receiving one or more basic electrical signals from the sensor.
This alert often occurs in conjunction with Alert 102.
Recommended actions
1. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
3. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
4. Check the integrity of the sensor tubes.
5. Perform sensor coil resistence checks.
12.32.4 A004
Alert
Temperature Overrange
Cause
The RTD resistance is out of range for the sensor. The tube RTD resistance is out of range for the sensor.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify temperature characterization or calibration parameters.
3. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
4. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
5. Contact customer support.
12.32.5 A005
Alert
Mass Flow Rate Overrange
Cause
The measured flow rate is greater than the maximum flow rate of the sensor (ΔT greater than 200 µs).
196 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Recommended actions
1. If other alerts are present, resolve those alert conditions first. If the current alert persists, continue with the recommended actions.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Check for two-phase flow.
12.32.6 A006
Alert
Characterization Required
Cause
• Calibration factors have not been entered
• The sensor type is incorrect
• The calibration factors are incorrect for the sensor type
Recommended actions
1. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
3. If Sensor Type = Curved Tube , ensure that no parameters specific to Straight Tube have been set.
4. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
5. Replace the core processor.
6. Contact customer support.
12.32.7 A008
Alert
Density Overrange
Cause
The line density is greater than 10 g/cm 3 (10000 kg/m 3 ).
Recommended actions
1. If other alerts are present, resolve those alert conditions first. If the current alert persists, continue with the following steps.
2. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
3. Check for two-phase flow.
4. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
5. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
Configuration and Use Manual 197
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
6. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
7. Perform density calibration.
8. Contact customer support.
12.32.8 A009
Alert
Transmitter Initializing/Warming Up
Cause
Transmitter is in power-up mode.
This alert often occurs in conjunction with Alert 14.
Recommended actions
1. Allow the meter to complete its power-up sequence. The alert should clear automatically.
2. If other alerts are present, resolve those alert conditions first. If the current alert persists, continue with the following steps.
3. Verify that the tubes are full of process fluid.
4. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
5. Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power. If using DC power, verify that there is a minimum of 1.5 amps of startup current available.
Option Description
If no
If yes
Correct the problem and cycle power to the meter.
The transmitter probably has an internal power issue. Replace the transmitter.
6. Ensure that the process fluid is stable.
Check for two-phase flow, high process noise, or a fast transition between two fluids of different densities.
12.32.9 A010
Alert
Calibration Failure
Cause
There are many possible causes. This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that your calibration procedure meets the documented requirements, cycle power to the meter, then retry the procedure.
2. If this alert appears during zeroing: a) Verify that there is no flow through the sensor.
198 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053 b) Cycle power to the meter.
c) Retry the procedure.
12.32.10 A011
Alert
Zero Calibration Failed: Low
Cause
There are many possible causes, such as:
• Too much flow, especially reverse flow through the sensor during a calibration procedure
• A zero result occurred that is too low.
This alert is accompanied by A010, and will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Verify that there is no flow through the sensor.
2. Cycle power to the meter.
3. Retry the procedure.
12.32.11 A012
Alert
Zero Calibration Failed: High
Cause
There are many possible causes, such as:
• Too much flow, especially forward flow through the sensor during a calibration procedure
• A zero result occurred that is too high.
This alert is accompanied by A010, and will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Verify that there is no flow through the sensor.
2. Cycle power to the meter.
3. Retry the procedure.
12.32.12 A013
Alert
Zero Calibration Failed: Unstable
Cause
There was too much process instability during the calibration procedure.
Configuration and Use Manual
Troubleshooting
October 2022
199
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise.
Example
Pumps, vibration, or pipe stress
2. Cycle power to the meter.
3. Retry the procedure.
12.32.13 A014
Alert
Transmitter Failure
Cause
There are many possible causes.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the grounding of all components.
4. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
5. Contact customer support.
12.32.14 A016
Alert
Sensor Temperature (RTD) Failure
Cause
The value computed for the resistance of the line RTD is outside limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
3. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
4. Contact customer support.
12.32.15 A017
Alert
Sensor Case Temperature (RTD) Failure
200 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Cause
The values computed for the resistance of the meter and case RTDs are outside limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
Temperature should be between -200 °F (-129 °C) and +400 °F (+204 °C).
2. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
3. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
4. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
5. Contact customer support.
12.32.16 A018
Alert
EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
Cause
The transmitter has experienced a memory error.
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
Important
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
7. If the alert persists, replace the transmitter.
12.32.17 A019
Alert
RAM Error (Transmitter)
Configuration and Use Manual 201
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Cause
The transmitter has experienced a memory error. This alert will not clear until you power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from the 9-wire cable are properly landed.
4. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
5. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
6. Power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
7. If the alert persists, replace the transmitter.
8. Contact customer support.
12.32.18 A020
Alert
Calibration Factors Missing
Cause
Some calibration factors have not been entered or are incorrect.
Recommended actions
1. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
3. If Sensor Type = Curved Tube, ensure that no parameters specific to Straight Tube have been set.
12.32.19 A021
Alert
Transmitter/Sensor/Software Mismatch
Cause
The configured board type does not match the physical board, or the configured sensor type does not match the physical sensor.
Recommended actions
1. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
202 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
2. Ensure that the correct board is installed.
3. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
4. If Sensor Type =Curved Tube, ensure that no parameters specific to Straight Tube have been set.
12.32.20 A022
Alert
Configuration Database Corrupt (Core Processor)
Cause
There has been an internal electronics failure.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.21 A023
Alert
Internal Totals Corrupt (Core Processor)
Cause
There has been an internal electronics failure.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.22 A024
Alert
Program Corrupt (Core Processor)
Cause
There has been an internal electronics failure.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.23 A025
Alert
Boot Sector Fault (Core Processor)
Configuration and Use Manual 203
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Cause
There has been an internal electronics failure.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.24 A026
Alert
Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
Cause
The transmitter has lost communication with the core processor. There may be a problem with the wiring or with either component.
This alert often occurs in conjunction with alerts A009 and A014.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Check for noise in the wiring or in the transmitter environment.
3. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
4. Check the status LED on the core processor.
5. Check the resistance across core processor terminals.
6. If the alert persists: a) Replace the core processor.
b) If that does not solve the problem, restore the original core processor and replace the transmitter.
c) If that does not solve the problem, replace both the transmitter and the core processor.
12.32.25 A027
Alert
Security Breach
Cause
• The transmitter has been switched from secure mode to unsecure mode. Only in unsecured mode can the transmitter configuration be changed.
• The HART device ID is set to zero.
Recommended actions
1. Return the transmitter to secure mode if changing the configuration is not needed.
2. Check the HART device ID.
204 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
For custody transfer or MID applications, it must be non-zero. If it is set to 0, contact the factory or customer support.
12.32.26 A028
Alert
Core Processor Write Failure
Cause
There is an internal electronics failure.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.27 A029
Alert
Internal Electronics Failure
Cause
This can indicate a loss of communication between the transmitter and the display module.
Recommended actions
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Replace the display module.
3. Contact customer support.
12.32.28 A030
Alert
Incorrect Board Type
Cause
The loaded software is not compatible with the programmed board type.
Recommended actions
Contact customer support.
12.32.29 A031
Alert
Low Power
Configuration and Use Manual 205
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Cause
The core processor or transmitter is not receiving enough power.
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the transmitter and the core processor.
2. Cycle power to the meter.
3. Check the wiring of the transmitter.
4. Cycle power to the meter.
5. Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power.
Option Description
If it is not a. Correct the problem.
b. Cycle power to the meter.
If it is The transmitter probably has an internal power issue. Replace the transmitter.
12.32.30 A032
Alert
Meter Verification in Progress: Outputs to Fault
Cause
A meter verification test is in progress, with outputs set to Fault.
Recommended actions
Allow the procedure to complete.
12.32.31 A033
Alert
Insufficient Pickoff Signal
Cause
The signal from the sensor pickoff(s) is insufficient. This suggests that the sensor tubes or vibrating elements are not vibrating. This alert often occurs in conjunction with Alert 102.
Recommended actions
1. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
2. Check for foreign material in the process gas or fluid, coating, or other process problems.
3. Check for fluid separation by monitoring the density value and comparing the results against expected density values.
206 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
4. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
12.32.32 A035
Alert
Meter Verification Aborted
Cause
The meter verification test did not complete, possibly because of a manual abort.
Recommended actions
1. Verify that process conditions are stable, then retry the test.
2. Contact customer support.
12.32.33 A100
Alert mA Output 1 Saturated
Cause
The calculated mA Output value is outside the configured range.
Recommended actions
1. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
2. Check process conditions.
Actual conditions may be outside the normal conditions for which the output is configured.
3. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
4. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
5. Purge the sensor tubes.
12.32.34 A101
Alert mA Output 1 Fixed
Cause
The HART address is set to a non-zero value, or the mA Output is configured to send a constant value.
Recommended actions
1. Check whether the output is in loop test mode. If it is, unfix the output.
2. Exit mA Output trim, if applicable.
Configuration and Use Manual 207
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
3. Check the HART address. If the HART address is non-zero, you may need to change the setting of mA Output Action .
4. Check whether the output has been set to a constant value via digital communication.
12.32.35 A102
Alert
Drive Overrange
Cause
The drive power (current/voltage) is at its maximum.
Recommended actions
1. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
3. Verify that internal wiring is secure and that there are no internal electrical problems.
4. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
5. Check for fluid separation by monitoring the density value and comparing the results against expected density values.
6. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application. Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
12.32.36 A103
Alert
Data Loss Possible (Totals and Inventories)
Cause
Totalizers are not properly saved. The device was unable to store the totalizers during the last power-down, and must rely on the saved totals. The saved totals can be as much as two hours out of date.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the transmitter and the core processor, then cycle power to the meter.
2. Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power.
Option Description
If it is not a. Correct the problem.
b. Cycle power to the meter.
If it is The transmitter probably has an internal power issue. Replace the transmitter.
208 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
12.32.37 A104
Alert
Calibration in Progress
Cause
A calibration procedure is in process.
Recommended actions
1. Allow the procedure to complete.
2. For zero calibration: a) Abort the calibration.
b) Set Zero Time to a lower value.
c) Restart the calibration.
12.32.38 A105
Alert
Two-Phase Flow
Cause
The line density is outside the user-defined two-phase flow limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check for two-phase flow.
2. Check the live density reading against the upper and lower two-phase flow limit settings.
12.32.39 A106
Alert
Burst Mode Enabled
Cause
HART burst mode is enabled.
Recommended actions
1. No action required.
2. If desired, you can set Alert Severity Level to Ignore.
12.32.40 A107
Alert
Power Reset Occurred
Configuration and Use Manual 209
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Cause
The transmitter has been restarted.
Recommended actions
No action is required.
If desired, you can set Alert Severity Level to Ignore.
12.32.41 A108
Alert
Basic Event 1 On
Cause
The process has triggered Basic Event 1.
Recommended actions
1. No action is required.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
12.32.42 A109
Alert
Basic Event 2 On
Cause
The process has triggered Basic Event 2.
Recommended actions
1. No action is required.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
12.32.43 A110
Alert
Frequency Output Saturated
Cause
The calculated Frequency Output is outside the configured range.
Recommended actions
1. Check the Frequency Output scaling.
2. Check process conditions.
Actual conditions may be outside the normal conditions for which the output is configured.
210 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
3. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
4. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
5. Purge the sensor tubes.
12.32.44 A111
Alert
Frequency Output Fixed
Cause
The Frequency Output has been configured to send a constant value.
Recommended actions
1. Cycling power to the meter or restarting totalizers will restore the Frequency Output to normal operation.
2. Check whether the output is in loop test mode. If it is, unfix the output.
3. Check whether the output has been set to a constant value vial digital communication.
12.32.45 A112
Alert
Upgrade Transmitter Software
Cause
The transmitter software is down-level from the core processor software.
Recommended actions
Contact customer support.
12.32.46 A113
Alert mA Output 2 Saturated
Cause
The calculated mA Output value is outside the configured range.
Recommended actions
1. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value .
2. Check process conditions.
Actual conditions may be outside the normal conditions for which the output is configured.
3. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, coating in the tubes, or other process problems.
Configuration and Use Manual 211
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
4. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
5. Purge the sensor tubes.
12.32.47 A115
Alert
No External Input or Polled Data
Cause
The connection to an external measurement device has failed. No external data is available.
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the external device is operating correctly.
2. Verify the wiring between the transmitter and the external device.
3. Verify the HART polling configuration.
12.32.48 A116
Alert
Temperature Overrange (Petroleum)
Cause
The measured temperature is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the petroleum measurement application and related parameters.
3. Verify the configuration of the API referral application and related parameters.
12.32.49 A117
Alert
Density Overrange (Petroleum)
Cause
The measured density is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the petroleum measurement application and related parameters.
3. Verify the configuration of the API referral application and related parameters.
212 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
12.32.50 ts_A117
Alert
Density Overrange (Petroleum)
Cause
The measured density is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the petroleum measurement application and related parameters.
3. Verify the configuration of the API referral application and related parameters.
12.32.51 A120
Alert
Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
Cause
The transmitter was unable to calculate a valid concentration matrix from the current data.
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
12.32.52 A121
Alert
Extrapolation Alert (Concentration)
Cause
The line density or line temperature is outside the range of the concentration matrix plus the configured extrapolation limit.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
12.32.53 A131
Alert
Meter Verification in Progress: Outputs to Last Measured Value
Cause
A meter verification test is in progress, with outputs set to Last Measured Value.
Configuration and Use Manual 213
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Recommended actions
Allow the procedure to complete.
12.32.54 A132
Alert
Sensor Simulation Active
Cause
Sensor simulation is enabled.
Recommended actions
Disable sensor simulation.
12.32.55 Density D[1 - 4] Calibration in Progress
Cause
A D[1 - 4] density calibration is in progress.
Recommended actions
No action required.
12.32.56 Reverse Flow
Cause
Flow through the device is in the reverse direction (against the flow arrow).
Recommended actions
No action is required.
12.32.57 Zero Calibration in Progress
Cause
A zero calibration is in progress.
Recommended actions
No action required.
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
214 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Troubleshooting
October 2022
12.33 Temperature measurement problems
Problem
Temperature reading significantly different from process temperature
Possible causes
• RTD failure
• Incorrect compensation factors
• Line temperature in bypass does not match temperature in main line
Recommended actions
• Check junction box for moisture or verdigris.
• Perform RTD resistance checks and check
for shorts to case (see Check the sensor coils
).
• Verify that the temperature compensation factors match the value on the sensor tag or calibration sheet.
• If Alert A004, A016, or A017 is active, perform the actions recommended for that alert.
Temperature reading slightly different from process temperature
• Sensor temperature not yet equalized
• Sensor leaking heat
Inaccurate temperature data from external device
• Wiring problem
• Problem with input configuration
• Problem with external device
• Problem with input configuration
• If the error is within the temperature specification for the sensor, there is no problem. If the temperature measurement is outside the specification, contact customer support.
• The temperature of the fluid may be changing rapidly. Allow sufficient time for the sensor to equalize with the process fluid.
• Perform RTD resistance checks and check
for shorts to case (see Check the sensor coils
).
• The electrical connection between the RTD and the sensor may be damaged. This may require replacing the sensor.
• Verify the wiring between the transmitter and the external device.
• Verify that the external device is operating correctly.
• Verify the configuration of the temperature input.
• Ensure that both devices are using the same measurement unit.
Configuration and Use Manual 215
Troubleshooting
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
216 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
A Using the transmitter display
This section explains how to use the 2700 display. Using the display, you can move through the menus, configure the application, monitor and control the application, and perform maintenance and diagnostic tasks.
A.1 Components of the transmitter interface
The transmitter interface includes the status LED, the display (LCD panel), and two optical switches.
Figure A-1: Transmitter interface
A
H
B
G
C
F
D
E
A. Status LED
B. Display (LCD panel)
C. Process variable
D.
Scroll optical switch
E. Optical switch indicator
F.
Select optical switch
G. Unit of measure for process variable
H. Current value of process variable
A.2 Use the optical switches
Use the optical switches on the transmitter interface to control the transmitter display. The transmitter has two optical switches: Scroll and Select .
Configuration and Use Manual 217
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Procedure
To activate an optical switch, block the light by holding your thumb or finger in front of the opening.
Tip
You can activate the optical switch through the lens. Do not remove the transmitter housing cover.
The optical switch indicator lights up when the transmitter senses that an optical switch has been activated.
Table A-1: Optical switch indicator and optical switch states
Optical switch indicator
Solid red
Flickering red
State of optical switches
One optical switch is activated.
Both optical switches are activated.
A.3 Access and use the display menu system
The display menu system is used to perform various configuration, administrative, and maintenance tasks.
Prerequisites
To access the display menu system, operator access to either the Off-Line menu or the Alert menu must be enabled. To access the complete menu system, operator access must be enabled for both the Off-Line menu and the Alert menu.
Tip
The display menu system does not provide complete configuration, administrative, or maintenance functions. For complete transmitter management, you must use another communications tool.
Procedure
1. At the transmitter display, activate the Scroll and Select optical switches simultaneously until the display changes.
You will enter the Off-Line menu at any of several locations, depending on several factors.
• If an alert is active and access to the Alert menu is enabled, you will see SEE ALERT .
• If no alert is active and Smart Meter Verification is enabled on the transmitter, you will see ENTER
METER VERFY .
• If no alert is active and Smart Meter Verification is not enabled on the transmitter, you will see OFF-
LINE MAINT .
2. If CODE?
appears on the display when you make a choice, enter the value that is configured for Off-Line
Password .
a) With the cursor flashing on the first digit, activate Scroll until the correct digit is displayed, then activate Select .
b) Repeat this process for the second, third, and fourth digits.
Tip
If you do not know the correct value for Off-Line Password , wait 30 seconds. The password screen will time out automatically and you will be returned to the previous screen.
3. Use the Scroll and Select optical switches to navigate to your destination in the display menu system.
218 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
• Use Scroll to move through a list of options.
• Use Select to choose the current option.
4. If Scroll flashes on the display, activate the Scroll optical switch, then the Select optical switch, and then the Scroll optical switch again.
The display will prompt you through this sequence. The Scroll-Select-Scroll sequence is designed to guard against accidental activation of the off-line menu. It is not designed as a security measure.
5. To exit a display menu and return to a higher-level menu:
• Activate Scroll until the EXIT option is displayed, then activate Select .
• If the EXIT option is not available, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the screen returns to the previous display.
6. To exit the display menu system, you can use either of the following methods:
• Exit each menu separately, working your way back to the top of the menu system.
• Wait two minutes until the display times out and returns to displaying process variable data.
A.3.1 Enter a floating-point value using the display
Certain configuration values (for example, Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value ) are entered as floating-point values. The display supports both decimal notation and exponential notation for floating-point values.
The display allows you to enter a maximum of 8 characters, including the sign. The decimal point is not counted as a character. Exponential notation is used to enter values that require more than 8 characters.
A.3.1 Enter a floating-point value using decimal notation
Decimal notation allows you to enter values between –9999999 and 99999999. You can use the decimal point to enter values with a precision of 0 through 4 (4 characters to the right of the decimal point).
Decimal values entered via the display must meet the following requirements:
• They can contain a maximum of 8 digits, or 7 digits plus a minus sign ( − ) to indicate a negative number.
• They can contain a decimal point. The decimal point does not count as a digit. The decimal point must be positioned so that the precision of the value does not exceed 4.
When you first enter the configuration screen, the current configuration value is displayed in decimal notation, and the active character is flashing. If the value is positive, no sign is displayed. If the value is negative, a minus sign is displayed.
Procedure
• To change the value: a) Activate Select until the digit you want to change is active (flashing).
Select moves the cursor one position to the left. From the leftmost position, Select moves the cursor to the rightmost digit.
b) Activate Scroll to change the value of the active digit.
c) Repeat until all digits are set as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual 219
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• To change the sign of the value:
• If the current value is negative, activate Select until the minus sign is flashing, then activate Scroll until the space is blank.
• If the current value is positive and there is a blank space at the left of the value, activate Select until the cursor is flashing under the blank space, then activate Scroll until the minus sign appears.
• If the current value is positive and there is no blank space at the left of the value, activate Select until the cursor is flashing under the leftmost digit, then activate Scroll until the minus sign appears.
• To move the decimal point: a) Activate Select until the decimal point is flashing.
b) Activate Scroll .
The decimal point is removed from its current position.
c) Activate Select and watch the position of the decimal point.
As the cursor moves to the left, the decimal point will flash between each pair of digits, up to a maximum precision of four (four digits to the right of the decimal point).
Tip
If the position is not valid, the decimal point is not displayed. Continue to activate Select until the decimal point appears at the right of the displayed value.
d) When the decimal point is in the desired position, activate Scroll .
The decimal point is inserted at its current position.
• To save the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
• If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
• If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Select .
• To exit the menu without saving the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
• If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
• If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Scroll .
A.3.1 Enter a floating-point value using exponential notation
Exponential notation is used to enter values that are larger than 99999999 or smaller than − 9999999.
Exponential values entered via the display must be in the following form: SX.XXXEYY
. In this string:
• S = Sign. A minus sign ( − ) indicates a negative number. A blank indicates a positive number.
• X.XXX = The 4-digit mantissa.
• E = The exponent indicator.
• YY = The 2-digit exponent.
220 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Procedure
1. Switch from decimal notation to exponential notation.
a) Activate Select as required until the rightmost digit is flashing.
b) Activate Scroll until E is displayed.
c) Activate Select .
Tip
If you have modified the value in decimal notation without saving the changes to transmitter memory, the changes will be lost when you switch to exponential notation. Save the decimal value before switching to exponential notation.
2. Enter the exponent.
The first character may be a minus sign or any digit between 0 and 3. The second character may be any digit between 0 and 9.
a) Activate Select to move the cursor to the rightmost character on the display.
b) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
c) Activate Select to move the cursor one position to the left.
d) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
3. Enter the mantissa.
The mantissa must be a 4-digit value with a precision of 3 (that is, all values between 0.000 and 9.999).
a) Activate Select to move the cursor to the rightmost digit in the mantissa.
b) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
c) Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
d) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
e) Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
f) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
g) Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
h) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
4. Enter the sign.
a) Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
b) Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
For positive numbers, select a blank space.
5. To save the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
• If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
Configuration and Use Manual 221
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
• If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Select .
6. Switch back from exponential notation to decimal notation.
a) Activate Select until the E is flashing.
b) Activate Select until d is displayed.
c) Activate Select .
A.4 Display codes for process variables
Table A-2: Display codes for process variables
FVZ
GSV F
GSV I
GSV T
LPO_A
LVOLI
LZERO
MASSI
Code
AVE_D
AVE_T
BRD_T
CONC
DRIVE%
EXT_P
EXT_T
MTR_T
NET M
NET V
NETMI
NETVI
PWRIN
RDENS
RPO_A
SGU
STD V
Definition
Average density
Average temperature
Board temperature
Concentration
Drive gain
External pressure
External temperature
Field verification zero
Gas standard volume flow
Gas standard volume inventory
Gas standard volume total
Left pickoff amplitude
Volume inventory
Live zero flow
Mass inventory
Case temperature (T-Series sensors only)
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Net mass inventory
Net volume inventory
Input voltage
Density at reference temperature
Right pickoff amplitude
Specific gravity units
Standard volume flow rate
Comment or reference
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Weights & Measures application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Refers to power input to the core processor
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
222 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Table A-2: Display codes for process variables (continued)
Code
STDVI
TCDENS
TCORI
TCORR
TCVOL
TUBEF
WTAVE
Definition
Standard volume inventory
Temperature-corrected density
Temperature-corrected inventory
Temperature-corrected total
Temperature-corrected volume
Raw tube frequency
Weighted average
Comment or reference
Concentration measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
A.5 Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
Code or abbreviation
ACK ALERT
ACK ALL
ACT
ADDR
AO1
AO 1 SRC
AO2
Definition
Acknowledge alert
Acknowledge all alerts
Action
Address
Analog output 1
(primary mA Output)
Fixed to the process variable assigned to the primary output
Analog output 2
(secondary mA Output)
Auto Scroll
Backlight
Comment or reference
AUTO SCRLL
BKLT
B LIGHT
CAL
CH A
CHANGE PASSW
CHANGE CODE
CH B
CH C
CONFG
CORE
CUR Z
CUSTODY XFER
Calibrate
Channel A
Change password or passcode
Channel B
Channel C
Configuration
Core processor
Current zero
Custody transfer
Change the password or passcode required for access to display functions
Configuration and Use Manual 223
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
EXTRN
FAC Z
FCF
FLDIR
FL SW
FLSWT
FO
FO FREQ
FO RATE
FREQ
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus (continued)
Code or abbreviation
DENS
D EV
Definition
Density
Discrete event
Comment or reference
Events configured using the enhanced event model
Fuel consumption applications only DFLOW
DGAIN, DRIVE %
DI
DISBL
DO1
DO2
DSPLY
E1OR2
ENABL
ENABLE ACK
ENABLE ALERTS
ENABLE AUTO
ENABLE OFFLN
ENABLE PASSW
ENABLE RESET
ENABLE START
EVNT1
EVNT2
Differential mass flow
Drive gain
Discrete Input
Disable
Discrete Output 1
Discrete Output 2
Display
Event 1 or Event 2
Enable
Enable acknowledge all
Enable alert menu
Enable Auto Scroll
Enable off-line
Enable password
Enable totalizer reset
Enable totalizer start
Event 1
Event 2
Select to disable
Events configured using the basic event model
Select to enable
Enable or disable the ACK ALL function
Access to alert menu from display
Enable or disable the Auto Scroll function
Access to off-line menu from display
Enable or disable password protection for display functions
Enable or disable totalizer reset from display
Enable or disable totalizer start/stop from display
Event configured using the basic event model only
Event configured using the basic event model only
External
Factory zero
Flow calibration factor
Flow direction
Flow switch
Frequency Output
Frequency factor
Rate factor
Frequency
224 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
MASS
MBUS
MFLOW
MSMT
MTR F
OFF-LINE MAINT
OFFLN
OIL
OIL60
P/UNT
POLAR
PRESS
QUAD r.
SCALE
SFM60
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus (continued)
Code or abbreviation
FR FL
GSV
HYSTRSIS
INTERN
IO
LANG
LOCK
LOOP CUR
M_ASC
M_RTU
MAO1
MAO2
SFO60
Definition
Frequency=Flow
Gas standard volume
Hysteresis
Internal
Input/output
Language
Write-protect
Loop current
Modbus ® ASCII
Modbus ® RTU mA Output 1
(primary mA Output) mA Output 2
(secondary mA Output)
Mass flow
Modbus
Mass flow
Measurement
Meter factor
Off-line maintenance
Off-line
Uncorrected oil flow
Corrected Net Oil Flow
Pulses/unit
Polarity
Pressure
Quadrature
Revision
Scaling method
Shrinkage factor corrected volume of mix at 60F
Shrinkage Fac Corr
Net Oil Total at Reference
Comment or reference
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
Configuration and Use Manual 225
Using the transmitter display
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus (continued)
Code or abbreviation
SIM
Definition
Simulation
Comment or reference
Used for loop testing, not simulation mode.
Simulation mode is not accessible through the display.
SPECL
SRC
TEMP, TEMPR
UNT/P
VAR 1
VER
VERFY
VFLOW
VOL
WATER
WATER%
WCT60%
WRPRO
WTR60
XMTR
Special
Source
Temperature
Units/pulse
Display Variable 1
Version
Verify
Volume flow
Volume, volume flow
Uncorrected Net
Water Flow Rate
Uncorrected Water Cut
Water Cut 60F
Write protect
Corrected Net
Water Flow
Transmitter
Variable assignment
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
PVR applications only
226 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
B Using ProLink III with the transmitter
B.1 Basic information about ProLink III
ProLink III is a configuration and service tool available from Micro Motion. ProLink III runs on a Windows platform and provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Version requirements
Use the latest version of ProLink III and the device firmware to support all features. For details about ProLink III device support, refer to the ProLink III ChangeLog.txt
file.
ProLink III requirements
To install ProLink III, you must have:
• The ProLink III installation media
• The ProLink III installation kit for your connection type:
To obtain ProLink III and the appropriate installation kit, contact customer support.
ProLink III documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with ProLink III or that you have a general familiarity with Windows programs. If you need more information than this manual provides, see the
Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual .
In most ProLink III installations, the manual is installed with the ProLink III program. Additionally, the
ProLink III manual is available on the documentation CD or at Emerson.com
.
ProLink III features and functions
ProLink III offers complete transmitter configuration and operation functions. ProLink III also offers a number of additional features and functions, including:
• A Professional version with expanded features not available on the Basic version
• The ability to save the transmitter configuration set to a file on the PC, and reload it or propagate it to other transmitters
• The ability to log specific types of data to a file on the PC
• The ability to view performance trends for various types of data on the PC
• The ability to connect to and view information for more than one device
• A guided connection wizard
These features are documented in the Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual . ProLink III features are not documented in this manual.
ProLink III messages
As you use ProLink III with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Configuration and Use Manual 227
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
B.2 Connect with ProLink III
A connection from ProLink III to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
B.2.1 Connection types supported by ProLink III
Different connection types are available for connecting from ProLink III to the transmitter. Choose the connection type appropriate to your network and the tasks you intend to perform.
The transmitter supports the following ProLink III connection types:
• Service port connections
• HART ® /Bell 202 connections
When selecting a connection type, consider the following:
• Service port connections are specialized Modbus/RS-485 connections that use standard connection parameters and a standard address that are already defined in ProLink III. Service port connections are typically used by field service personnel for specific maintenance and diagnostic functions. Use a service port connection only when another connection type does not provide the functionality you need.
• HART/Bell 202 connections use standard HART connection parameters that are already defined in
ProLink III. The only parameter you must configure is the transmitter address.
• Some connection types require opening the wiring compartment or the power supply compartment.
These connection types should be used only for temporary connections, and may require extra safety precautions.
• When you are using a HART connection, ProLink III will not allow you to open more than one window at a time. This is done to manage network traffic and optimize speed.
• You cannot make concurrent Modbus connections if the connections use the same terminals. You can make concurrent Modbus connections if the connections use different terminals.
B.2.2 Connect with ProLink III to the service port
Prerequisites
• ProLink III is installed and licensed on your PC
• One of the following:
— RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
— USB to RS-485 signal converter
• An available serial port or USB port
• Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
228 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not use a service port connection. Service port connections require opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require removing the transmitter housing cover.
Procedure
1. Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2. Access the service port terminals: a) Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b) Loosen the screw on the Warning flap and open the power supply compartment.
3. Connect the leads from the signal converter to the service port, terminals 7 (RS-485/B) and 8
(RS-485/A).
Tip
Usually, but not always, the black lead is RS-485/A and the red lead is RS-485/B.
Figure B-1: Connection to service port
E
A
B C
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Service port terminal 7 (RS-485/B)
D. Service port terminal 8 (RS-485/A)
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4. Start ProLink III.
5. Choose Connect to Physical Device .
Configuration and Use Manual
D
229
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
6. Set Protocol to Service Port.
Tip
Service port connections use standard connection parameters and a standard address. You do not need to configure them here.
7. Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8. Click Connect .
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Switch the leads and try again.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct port on your PC.
• Check the wiring between the PC and the transmitter.
B.2.3 Make a HART
®
/Bell 202 connection
Prerequisites
• ProLink III is installed and licensed on your PC
• One of the following:
— RS-232 to Bell 202 signal converter
— USB to Bell 202 signal converter
• An available serial port or USB port
• Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
You can connect directly to the primary mA terminals on the transmitter, to any point in a local HART loop, or to any point in a HART multidrop network.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals. Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
WARNING
If you connect directly to the mA terminals, the transmitter's mA Output may be affected. If you are using the mA Output for process control, set devices for manual control before connecting directly to the mA terminals.
Procedure
1. Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2. To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a) Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
230 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022 b) Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 1 and 2.
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
c) Add resistance as necessary to achieve at least one volt across the connection points.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1-5 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of
250–600 Ω to the connection.
Figure B-2: Connection to transmitter terminals
A
C
B
A. Computer
B. Signal converter
C. Transmitter
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3. To connect to a point in the local HART loop: a) Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point in the loop.
b) Add resistance as necessary to achieve at least one volt across the connection points.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1-5 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of
250–600 Ω to the connection.
Configuration and Use Manual 231
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
Figure B-3: Connection over local loop
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
E
A
D
R3
R2
C
R1
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Any combination of resistors R1, R2, and R3 as necessary to meet HART communication resistance requirements
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4. To connect over a HART multidrop network: a) Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b) Add resistance as necessary to achieve at least one volt across the connection points.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1-5 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of
250–600 Ω to the connection.
232 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Figure B-4: Connection over multidrop network
D
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
B
A
C
A. Signal converter
B. 250–600 Ω resistance
C. Devices on the network
D. Master device
5. Start ProLink III.
6. Choose Connect to Physical Device .
7. Set Protocol to HART Bell 202.
Tip
HART/Bell 202 connections use standard connection parameters. You do not need to configure them here.
8. If you are using a USB signal converter, enable Toggle RTS .
9. Set Address/Tag to the HART polling address configured in the transmitter.
Tip
• If this is the first time you are connecting to the transmitter, use the default address: 0.
• If you are not in a HART multidrop environment, the HART polling address is typically left at the default value.
• If you are unsure of the transmitter’s address, click Poll . The program will search the network and return a list of the transmitters that it detects.
10. Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
11. Set Master as appropriate.
Configuration and Use Manual 233
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Option Description
Secondary Use this setting if a primary HART host such as a DCS is on the network.
Primary Use this setting if no other primary host is on the network. A field communicator is a secondary host.
12. Click Connect .
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the HART address of the transmitter, or poll HART addresses 1–15.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct port on your PC.
• Check the wiring between the PC and the transmitter.
• Increase or decrease resistance.
• Ensure that there is no conflict with another HART master. If any other host (DCS or PLC) is connected to the mA Output, temporarily disconnect the DCS or PLC wiring.
234 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
October 2022
C Using a field communicator with the transmitter
C.1 Basic information about field communicators
A field communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool that can be used with a variety of devices, including Micro Motion transmitters. It provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Field communicator documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with field communicators and can perform the following tasks:
• Turn on the field communicator
• Navigate the field communicator menus
• Establish communication with HART ® -compatible devices
• Send configuration data to the device
• Use the alpha keys to enter information
Device descriptions (DDs)
In order for a field communicator to work with your device, the appropriate device description (DD) must be installed: 2000CMass flo, Dev v8 DD v1
To view the device descriptions that are installed on your field communicator:
1. At the HART application menu, press Utility → Available Device Descriptions .
2. Scroll the list of manufacturers and select Micro Motion , then scroll the list of installed device descriptions.
If Micro Motion is not listed, or you do not see the required device description, use a field communicator's upgrade utility to install the device description or contact customer support.
Field communicator menus and messages
Many of the menus in this manual start with the On-Line menu. Ensure that you are able to navigate to the On-
Line menu.
As you use a field communicator with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
Field communicator with PVR, TBR, TMR, and fuel consumption applications
Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR), Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR), Transient Mist Remediation
(TMR), and fuel consumption are available only over HART with HART 7 enabled (default).
Configuration and Use Manual 235
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
C.2 Connect with a field communicator
A connection from the Field Communicator to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
Prerequisites
The following HART device description (DD) must be installed on the Field Communicator: 2000CMass flo,
Dev v8, DD v1.
You can connect the Field Communicator to the primary mA terminals on the transmitter, to any point in a local HART loop, or to any point in a HART multidrop network.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect the Field Communicator to the mA terminals on the transmitter. This connection requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area can cause an explosion.
Procedure
1. To connect to the transmitter terminals: a) Remove the cover from the wiring compartment.
b) Attach the leads from the Field Communicator to terminals 1 and 2 on the transmitter and add resistance as required.
The Field Communicator must be connected across a resistance of 250–600 Ω.
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
Figure C-1: Field Communicator connection to transmitter terminals
236
A. Field Communicator
B. 250–600 Ω resistance
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
2. To connect to a point in the local HART loop, attach the leads from the Field Communicator to any point in the loop and add resistance as necessary.
The Field Communicator must be connected across a resistance of 250–600 Ω.
Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
Figure C-2: Field Communicator connection to local HART loop
October 2022
A. Field Communicator
B. 250–600 Ω resistance
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
3. To connect to a point in the HART multidrop network, attach the leads from the Field Communicator to any point on the network.
Figure C-3: Field Communicator connection to multidrop network
A. Field communicator
B. 250–600 Ω resistance
C. Devices on the network
D. Master device
4. Turn on the field communicator and wait until the main menu is displayed.
5. If you are connecting across a multidrop network:
• Set the field communicator to poll. The device returns all valid addresses.
• Enter the HART address of the transmitter. The default HART address is 0. However, in a multidrop network, the HART address has probably been set to a different, unique value.
Configuration and Use Manual 237
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Postrequisites
To navigate to the Online menu, choose HART Application → Online . Most configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting tasks are performed from the Online menu.
Tip
You may see messages related to the DD or active alerts. Press the appropriate buttons to ignore the message and continue.
Need help?
The field communicator requires a minimum of 1 VDC across the connection leads to communicate. If necessary, increase the resistance at the connection point until 1 VDC is achieved.
238 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Default values and ranges
October 2022
D Default values and ranges
D.1 Default values and ranges
The default values and ranges represent the typical factory transmitter configuration. Depending on how the transmitter was ordered, certain values may have been configured at the factory and are not represented in the default values and ranges.
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
Type
Flow
Parameter
Flow direction
Flow damping
Flow calibration factor
Default
Forward
1.00005.13
Range Comments
0.0 – 51.2 sec User-entered value is corrected to the nearest valid value in list of preset values.In Special mode, the preset values are 1/5 normal.
For gas applications, a minimum value of 2.56 is recommended.
The 2.56 value will be automatically rounded up to 3.2
seconds.
For sensors, this value represents the FCF and FT factors concatenated.
Mass flow units
Mass flow cutoff g/s
Sensor-specific value set at factory
For most sensors, the typical setting is 0.05% to 0.10% of the sensor's rated maximum flow rate. For some sensors, the setting may be higher.
For some applications, such as empty-full-empty batching, a higher value is recommended.
Contact customer service for assistance.
Volume flow type
Volume flow units
Volume flow cutoff
Liquid
L/s
0/0 L/s 0.0 – x L/s x is obtained by multiplying the flow calibration factor by 0.2, using units of L/s.
Meter factors Mass factor
Density factor
Density
Volume factor
Density damping
1
1
1
1.6 sec 0.0 – 51.2 sec User-entered value is corrected to nearest valid value in a list of preset values.
Configuration and Use Manual 239
Default values and ranges
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges (continued)
Type Parameter
Density units
Density cutoff
D1
D2
K1
Default g/cm 3
0.2 g/cm 3
0 g/cm 3
1 g/cm 3
1000 µsec
K2 50,000 µsec
Range
0.0 – 0.5 g/cm 3
1000 – 50,000
µsec
1000 – 50,000
µsec
Two-phase flow
FD
Temp Coefficient
Two-phase flow low limit
0
4.44
0.0 g/cm 3
Comments
Two-phase flow high limit
Two-phase duration
Temperature Temperature damping
5.0 g/cm 3
0.0 sec
4.8 sec
0.0 – 10.0
g/cm 3
0. 0 – 10.0
g/cm 3
0.0 – 60.0 sec
0.0 – 38.4 sec User-entered value is corrected to nearest valid value in a list of preset values.
Pressure
Temperature units Deg C
Temperature calibration factor 1.00000T0.000
0
Pressure units
Flow factor
PSI
0
Density factor
Cal pressure
T-Series sensor D3
D4
K3
K4
FTG
0
0
0 g/cm 3
0 g/cm 3
0 µsec
0 µsec
0
0
Special units
FFQ
DTG
DFQ1
DFQ2
Base mass unit
Base mass time
0
0
0 g sec
240 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Default values and ranges
October 2022
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges (continued)
Type
Variable mapping mA Output 1 mA Output 2
Parameter
Mass flow conversion factor
Base volume unit
Base volume time
Volume flow conversion factor
Primary variable
Secondary variable
Tertiary variable
Quaternary variable
Primary variable
LRV
URV
AO cutoff
AO added damping
LSL
USL
MinSpan
Fault action
AO fault level – downscale
AO fault level – upscale
Last measured value timeout
Secondary variable
LRV
URV
AO cutoff
AO added damping
Default
1
L sec
1
Mass flow
Density
Mass flow
Volume flow
Mass flow
–200.00000
g/s
200.00000 g/s
0.00000 g/s
0.00000 sec
Range Comments
–200 g/s
200 g/s
0.3 g/s
Downscale
2.0 mA
22 mA
0.00 sec
Density
0.00 g/cm3
10.00 g/cm3
Not-A-Number
0.00000 sec
1.0 – 3.6 mA
21.0 – 24.0 mA
The user-entered value is corrected down to the nearest lower value in a list of preset values.
Read-only.
LSL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read only.
USL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read-only.
Configuration and Use Manual 241
Default values and ranges
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges (continued)
Type
LRV
URV
Frequency
Output
Parameter
LSL
USL
MinSpan
Fault action
AO fault level – downscale
AO fault level – upscale
Last measured value timeout
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
Gas standard volume flow rate
External temperature
External pressure
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
Gas standard volume flow rate
External temperature
External pressure
Tertiary variable
Frequency factor
Flow rate factor
Scaling method
Frequency fault action
Default
0.00 g/cm 3
10.00 g/cm 3
Range
0.05 g/cm 3
Downscale
2.0 mA
22 mA
0.00 sec
− 200.000 g/s
− 0.200 L/s
0.000 g/cm 3
− 240.000 °C
0.000%
− 423.78SCFM
− 240.000 °C
0.000 psi
200.000 g/s
0.200 L/s
10.000 g/cm 3
450.000 °C
100.000%
423.78 SCFM
450.000 °C
100.000 psi
Mass flow
1,000.00 Hz
1.0 – 3.6 mA
21.0 – 24.0 mA
0.001 – 10,000
Hz
1000 kg/min
Freq=Flow 0 or 0.5 –
277.5 ms
Downscale
Comments
Read-only.
LSL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read only.
USL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read-only.
242 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Default values and ranges
October 2022
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges (continued)
Type Parameter
Frequency fault level – upscale
Default
15,000 Hz
Range
10.0 – 15,000
Hz
Discrete
Output 1
Discrete
Output 2
Frequency Output polarity
Last measured value timeout
Source
Fault Indicator
Power
Polarity
Source
Polarity
Discrete Input Actions
Polarity
Display Backlight on/off
Refresh rate
Variable 1
Variable 2
Variable 3
Variable 4
Variable 5
Variable 6
Variable 7
Variable 8–15
Display totalizer start/stop
Display totalizer reset
Display auto scroll
Display offline menu
Display offline password
Display alarm menu
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Display acknowledge all alarms Enabled
Offline password 1234
Auto scroll rate
Digital comm Fault action
Fault timeout
10 sec
None
0 seconds
Mass flow rate
Mass total
Volume flow rate
Volume total
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
None
Disabled
Disabled
Active high
0.0 seconds
Flow direction
None
Internal
Active high
Flow switch
Active high
None
Active low
On
200 milliseconds
0.0 – 60.0 sec
100 – 10,000 milliseconds
0.0 – 60.0 sec
Comments
Configuration and Use Manual 243
Default values and ranges
October 2022
Table D-1: Transmitter default values and ranges (continued)
Type Parameter
Double-precision byte order
(1) In Special mode, the default value is 0.64 sec.
Default
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8
Range
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Comments
244 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Transmitter components and installation wiring
October 2022
E Transmitter components and installation wiring
E.1 Installation types
The transmitter was ordered and shipped to be installed in one of several possible configurations.
Figure E-1: Integral installation
The transmitter is mounted directly to the sensor. Integral installations do not require separate transmitter installation. Power supply and I/O must be field wired to the transmitter.
A. Transmitter
B. Sensor
Configuration and Use Manual 245
Transmitter components and installation wiring
October 2022
Figure E-2: High-temperature meters with factory connection
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
The transmitter is shipped with a flexible connection factory installed between the sensor and the transmitter.
The transmitter must be dismounted from its shipping location (spot-welded to the sensor case) and then mounted separately. Power supply and I/O must be field wired to the transmitter.
A. Sensor
B. Transmitter or core processor
C. Factory-installed flexible connection
Figure E-3: 4-wire remote installation for Coriolis meters
The transmitter is installed remotely from the sensor. The 4-wire connection between the sensor and transmitter must be field wired. Power supply and I/O must be field wired to the transmitter.
A. Transmitter
B. Field-wired 4-wire connection
C. Core processor
D. Sensor
246 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Figure E-4: 9-wire remote installation
Transmitter components and installation wiring
October 2022
The transmitter and core processor are combined in a single unit that is installed remotely from the sensor.
The 9-wire connection between the transmitter/core processor and the sensor must be field wired. The power supply must be field wired to the transmitter.
A. Transmitter
B. Field-wired 9-wire connection
C. Junction box
D. Sensor
Figure E-5: Remote core processor with remote sensor installation
The transmitter, core processor, and sensor are all mounted separately. The 4-wire connection between the transmitter and core processor must be field wired. The 9-wire connection between the core processor and the sensor must be field wired. The power supply and I/O must be field wired to the transmitter. This configuration is sometimes called double-hop.
A. Junction box
B. Sensor
C. Transmitter
D. Field-wired 4-wire connection
E. Core processor
F. Field-wired 9-wire connection
Configuration and Use Manual 247
Transmitter components and installation wiring
October 2022
E.2 Power supply terminals and ground
Figure E-6: Power supply wiring terminals
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
A. Warning flap
B. Equipment ground
C. Power supply wiring terminals (9 and 10)
E.3 Input/output (I/O) wiring terminals
Figure E-7: I/O wiring terminals
248
A. mA/HART
B. mA Output, Frequency Output, or Discrete Output
C. Frequency Output, Discrete Output, or Discrete Input
Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
NE 53 history
October 2022
F NE 53 history
F.1 NE 53 history
Important
Not all features and capabilities described in this section may apply to your transmitter or configuration.
August 2000, Version 1.x
Modification type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
Added writing of the device tag using Modbus ®
Improved communication handling with the HART ® Tri-Loop product
Indication of outputs option board type appears on display at power-up
May 2001, version 2.x
Modification type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
• Added alarm A106 to indicate that HART burst mode is enabled
• Indication of outputs option board type appears on display at power-up
• Added alarm A106 to indicate that HART burst mode is enabled
• Control of HART burst mode now available via Modbus
• Added support for the Model 1700 transmitter
• Added support for the intrinsically safe transmitter option
• Added support to configure the process variable units for mass flow, volume flow, density and temperature from the display
• Added support for assigning process variables to the mA and Frequency
Output from the display
Clarified the interaction of the digital fault setting and the fault timeout (last measured value timeout)
• Drive gain can be assigned to mA Output
• Pressure compensation added via HART
• Channel B can be configured as a Discrete Output
Configuration and Use Manual 249
NE 53 history
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
December 2001, version 3.x
Modification type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
• Added support for the configurable I/O option board
• Software version information available via the display or Modbus
• Configurable density cutoff
• Additional HART variables can be assigned to QV
• The display start/stop totalizers function can be enabled or disabled
• Petroleum measurement application improvements
• Live zero available as display variable
• Increased options for fault output settings
• New cryogenic application temperature algorithms
• Improved Frequency Output stability and unit conversions
• Improved the handling of volume flow rate when two-phase flow is detected
• Improved handling of density values and calibrations during fault conditions
• Display configuration, screen flow and optical switch changes
• HART communication and burst mode improvements
• Petroleum measurement application added
• Custody transfer option added to the configurable I/O option board
• HART polling for external pressure/temperature added
June 2003, version 4.x
Modification type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
• Added support for the Model 1500 transmitter
• Additional variables displayed by the Model 1700 transmitter
• Improved the handling of certain alarm conditions
• Clarified the behavior of certain Modbus calibration coils
• Clarified the interaction between certain density measurement units and density cutoff values
• Improved the handling of the mA source setting via the display
• Improvements to pressure and temperature polling
• HART Tri-Loop and other communication improvements
• Clarified the value returned by Modbus scaled integer registers during a fault condition
Discrete values now available through Modbus
250 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
NE 53 history
October 2022
September 2006, version 5.x
Modification type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
• Discrete Output assignable as a flow switch
• Discrete Output fault indication configurability
• Discrete Input support for multiple action assignments
• Added support for querying the display LED status via Modbus
• Additional HART and Modbus commands
• Process comparator expanded to five configurable events
• Factory configuration restore function
• Factory zero restore function
• Alarm history expanded
• Selectable write protection for configuration data
• Expanded selection of source assignments for mA Output
• Expanded storage of mA range values
• Expanded custody transfer application for independent implementation of
NTEP and OIML compliance
Display improvements for floating-point data
• Configurable alarm severity
• Gas standard volume functionality
• Meter verification availability as an option
• Multiple display language selections
September 2009, version 6.x
Modification type
Expansion
Change
• Frequency Output configurable as Discrete Output on Series 1000 transmitters
• Discrete Output assignable as flow switch on Series 1000 transmitters
• Display Variable 1 optionally fixed to process variable assigned to primary mA Output
• Frequency Output scaling method and related parameters configurable from display
• For enhanced density and petroeum measurement process variables, display cycles among variable name, current value and unit, and reference temperature
Configuration and Use Manual 251
NE 53 history
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Modification type
Adjustment
Feature
Change
• mA Output Fault Action = None and Digital Communications Fault Action =
NAN is no longer allowed
• Frequency Output Fault Action = None and Digital Communications Fault
Action = NAN is no longer allowed
• Display variables set to a volume process variable automatically switch between liquid and GSV, according to current setting of Volume Flow Type
• Configurable hysteresis for flow switch
• Field Verification Zero added to support Weights & Measures application
• Transmitter firmware checksum and core processor firmware checksum assignable as display variables and viewable in ProLink
February 2018, version 8.x
Modification type
Expansion
Change
• Polling an external device for base density Gas Standard Volume (GSV)
• NE 53 version added to the display and accessed using Modbus and HART
• Improved data update rate for Advanced Zero Check using ProLink III
• Byte order configuration for double totals
• Modbus Function 43 basic objects for FDI identification
• Fast access to Live Zero in 100 Hz mode
• Display used to disable user access to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Once disabled, access can only be enabled using ProLink III or a HART device
252 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Modification type
Adjustment
NE 53 history
October 2022
Change
• Sensors that are not straight tube sensors are now correctly identified
• The mA Output fixed alert is now set
• The Factory Configuration Invalid status bit is now set correctly when connected to a 700 core processor — as the 700 core processor does not support saving and restoring the factory configuration
• Enabling a new feature on a flow-only device does not reset the output configuration to factory defaults
• Polled variables are now converted to the transmitter units before being used
• HART Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Variables can be changed using
HART when the transmitter is configured for gas standard volume
• Petroleum measurement variables are removed from the display when petroleum measurement is disabled
• The mA Output can be fixed when assigned to a concentration measurement, petroleum measurement, or GSV variable when the transmitter is not connected to a core processor
• The units for concentration curve data are correctly converted when the data is entered using HART
• Meter verification failed and aborted alerts are now reflected in the HART
More Status flag
• The HART Squawk command is functional when the HART write protect is enabled
• Locking the transmitter, unlocking the transmitter, or changing write protection does not set the HART Configuration Changed flag
• If connected to a 700 core processor with software version 3.1 or earlier, there is no longer a core processor write failed alert when setting volume flow units to beer barrels per time unit
• The factory zero value is immediately updated from the core processor after running a zero calibration and saving the factory configuration
• A firmware upgrade done without clearing non-volatile memory no longer causes an EEPROM Failure alert
• The status bit for the undefined A141 alert (Device Data Capture Triggered) no longer appears in the Modbus status register
• When using AMS to configure the transmitter:
— Changing the output configuration for mA 1, mA 2, or the Frequency
Output, does not change the configuration of all three outputs
— mA configuration methods can be cancelled
— Density and temperature units display on the concentration measurement configuration page
— An AMS Field Device did not respond message no longer displays when the concentration offset is configured even though the value was changed
Configuration and Use Manual 253
NE 53 history
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
Modification type
Feature
Change
— When the volume flow type is changed, the new setting is updated from the transmitter without having to rescan the device
• Basic meter verification
• Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR)
• Transient Mist Remediation (TMR)
• Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR)
• Piecewise Linearization for Gas
• Fuel consumption
• Support for Micro Load
May 2018, version 8.02/v6.82
• Added Basic Smart Meter Verification (SMV).
• Changed the default for the HART version to HART 7.
• Added Production Volume Reconciliation (PVR) that requires an 800 Enhanced Core Processor with version 4.42 or greater software and HART 7.
• Added Transient Mist Remediation (TMR) that requires an 800 Enhanced Core Processor with version 4.42
or greater software and HART 7.
• Added Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR) that requires an 800 Enhanced Core Processor with version
4.42 or greater software and HART 7.
• Added Piecewise Linearization for gas that requires an 800 Enhanced Core Processor with version 4.42 or greater software and HART 7.
• Added fuel consumption to require HART 7.
• Added polling an external device for base density for Gas Standard Volume.
• Added support for Micro Load .
• The NE53 version is added to the display and can be accessed using Modbus and HART.
• Improved the update rate of the data for Advanced Zero Check using ProLink III.
• Added byte order configuration for double totals.
• Added Modbus Function 43 basic objects for FDI identification.
• Added fast access to Live Zero in 100 Hz mode.
• Added the ability to use the display to configure user access to the Smart Meter Verification menu on the display. This feature can be used only to disable access. Once disabled, access can only be enabled using
ProLink III or a HART device.
254 Micro Motion 2700 Transmitters with Configurable Input/Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019053
October 2022, version 8.02
Updated SMV documentation to add or clarify the following sections:
• SMV test preparation
• Smart Meter Verification capabilities
• Interpreting Smart Meter Verification results
• Resolving a failed Smart Meter Verification test
NE 53 history
October 2022
Configuration and Use Manual 255
For more information: www.emerson.com
© 2022 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson
Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD and MVD Direct
Connect marks are marks of one of the Emerson Automation
Solutions family of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners.
*MMI-20019053*
MMI-20019053
Rev. AC
2022
Pakua
Kiungo cha umma kime sasishwa
Kiungo cha umma kwa mazungumzo yako kimesasishwa. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Kiungo cha umma cha hati
Tangazo
